Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

the+phrase

  • 101 ELDR

    I)
    (-s, -ar), m. fire; taka eld, drepa (upp) eld, to strike fire: kveikja (upp) eld, to light a fire; bregða (koma, skjóta) eldi í e-t, láta (leggja) eld í e-t, to set fire to, to set on fire; e. varð lauss ok lék skjótt, a fire broke out and spread rapidly; e. hraut af sverðum þeirra, sparks of fire flew from their swords.
    pp. grown old, worn by age; kvazt e. vera mjök frá úfriði, said that he was too old for fighting.
    * * *
    m., gen. ellds, also spelt ellz, [a word that may be taken as a test of Scandin. races; Dan. ild; Swed. äld; for the Teut. nations use the word feuer, fire, which is wanting in Scandin., though used by old Icel. poets, who probably borrowed it from A. S.; on the other hand, Ulf. constantly renders πυρ by fon, Icel. funi, q. v.; in A. S. poetry and in Hel. äled = incendiary occurs a few times, and älan = Lat. urere (Grein and Schmeller); Rask suggests a Finn. origin]:—fire. In cold climates fire and life go together; hence the proverb, eldr er beztr með ýta sonum, ok sólar sýn, fire is best among the sons of men, and the sight of the sun, Hm. 67: in reference to the healing power of fire, eldr tekr við sóttum, fire consumes ( cures) fevers, 138; sá er eldrinn heitastr er á sjálfum brennr, Grett. 136 new Ed.: allit., e. né járn, fire nor iron, Edda 82; hvárki egg né eld, 162; eldr ( sparks of fire) hraut or sverðum þeirra, Flóv. 29; e. þótti af hrjóta er vápnin kómu saman, Sturl. iii. 187, vide Fms. i. 292, vi. 153, vii. 338 (MS. ell), viii. 74, 202, x. 29. Nj. 74, Eluc. 19, 625. 178.
    β. the eruption of a volcano, Bs. i. 803, 804; jarð-eldr, ‘earth-fire,’ subterranean fire.
    COMPDS: eldsbruni, eldsdaunn, eldsgangr, eldsglór, eldsgneisti, eldsgólf, eldsgögn, eldshiti, eldskveykja, eldslitr, eldslíki, eldsljós, eldslogi, eldsmatr, eldsneyti, eldsstólpi, eldsuppkváma, eldsvélar, eldsvimr, eldsvirki.
    II. esp. in plur. a fire on the hearth; the proverbs, við eld skal öl drekka, by the fireside shalt thou drink ale, Hm. 82; allir eldar brenna út um síðir, all fires (beacons) burn out at last (of the death of an aged man): allit., eldr á arni (vide arinn). In the old halls in Scandinavia an oblong hearth was built in the middle of the hall, and the fires kindled were called langeldar, long fires, with an opening in the thatch called ljóri for a chimney; the benches in the hall were ranged on both sides of the langeldar, vide Edda 82 (the hall of king Adils); hence the phrase, bera öl um eld, to hand the ale round the fire, viz. to one’s cup fellow on the opposite bench, Fagrsk. ch. 219, Grett. ch. 10, new Ed. p. 23; elda-skálar vóru stórir á bæjuni, sátu menn við langelda á öptnum, þá voru borð sett fyrir menn fyrir (innan MS. Holm.), sváfu menn upp (út MS. Holm.) frá eldunum, Kristni S. ch. 2; þá vóru görvir eldar stórir eptir endilöngum skálanum, sem í þann tíma var títt, at drekka öl við eld, Bs. i. 42; cp. Orkn., eldar vóru á gólfinu, on the floor, ch. 18, where the fire seems to have been made in a pit (vide eldgróf) in the middle of the floor, cp. also kipti honum upp at pallinum, vide bakeldr: again, at the evening and morning meals people gathered round the ‘meal-fires’ (mál-eldar), hence the phrases, sitja við elda, to sit at the fire; vóru görfir máleldar hvert kveld í elda-skála sem siðr var til, sátu menn löngum við eldana áðr menn gengu til matar, Eb. ch. 52: máleldr, the ‘meal-fire’ or the small fire, is distinguished from langeldr, the great fire, 276; þat var í þann tíma er þeir Snorri sátu við málelda (yfir málborði, v. 1.), ch. 26; höfðu menn orðit vátir ok vóru görvir máleldar (langeldar, v. 1.), Nj. ch. 8; ok er skálabúinn var mettr sat hann við eld, Fs. 6; snýr at dyrum, er menn sátu við langelda ( in the evening), Korm. ch. 15; um kveldit er menn sátu við elda, Orkn. 448: the phrase, sitja milli elda, to sit between two fires, to be in a strait, vide Gm.
    COMPDS: eldahús, eldaskáli, eldaskára, eldsgörð.
    III. a beacon, bale-fire, Gs. 18.
    IV. in old poetry the fire of wounds or of Odin = weapons, the fire of the sea = gold; hauga-eldar, magical fire in old cairns; maur-ildi, a glow-worm; hrævar-eldr, a Will o’ the wisp, ignis fatuus.
    V. as a prefix to pr. names, Eld-grímr, Eld-járn, Eld-ríð, etc.: in names of places it denotes volcanic ground, Eld-borg, eld-fjall, eld-gjá, etc.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > ELDR

  • 102 GÖRÐ

    gjörð, gerð, f. [göra]:
    1. used of making, building, workmanship; görð ok gylling, Vm. 47; kirkju-görð, church-building; húsa-g., house-building; skipa-g., ship-building; garð-g., fence-making:—of performance, vígslu-g., inauguration; messu-g., saying of mass, divine service; þjónustu-g., embættis-g., id.; þakkar-g., thanksgiving; bænar-g., prayer; lof-g., praise; ölmusu-g., alms-giving; frið-g., peace-making; sættar-g., settlement, agreement, arbitration:—of working, akr-g., tillage; ú-gerð, bad workmanship, patchwork; við-gerð, mending:—of yielding (of duties), tíundar-görð, tithe; leiðangrs-g., paying levy:—of cookery and the like, öl-görð, ale-making, brewing; matar-g., cooking; brauð-g., baking: sundr-gerð, show: til-gerð, whims: upp-gerð, dissimulation: eptir-görð, q. v.: í-görð, suppuration.
    2. a doing, act, deed; the phrase, orð ok görðir, words and deeds, Fms. iii. 148; ef þú launar svá mína görð, Ísl. ii. 141, Stj. 250, 252, Dipl. i. 7: so in the phrase, söm þín gerð, as good as the deed (in declining a kind offer); góð-görð, vel-görð, a good deed, benefit; íll-görðir (pl.), evil doings; mein-görðir, transgressions: in gramm. the active voice, Skálda 180.
    II. a law term, arbitration; the settlement was called sætt or sættar-görð, the umpires görðar-menn, m., Grág., Nj. passim; and the verdict gerð or görð, cp. göra C. IV:—the technical phrases were, leggja mál í görð, to submit a case to arbitration, passim; vóru málin í gerð lagin með umgangi ok sættarboðum góðgjarna manna, Eb. 128; or slá málum í sætt, Rd. 248, Eb. ch. 56; leggja mál undir e-n, Lv. ch. 27: nefna menn til görðar (ch. 4), or taka menn til görðar, to choose umpires; vóru menn til gerðar teknir ok lagðr til fundr, Nj. 146: skilja undir gerð (sátt), or skilja undan, to stipulate, of one of the party making a stipulation to be binding on the umpire (as e. g. the award shall not be outlawry but payment), en þó at vandliga væri skilit undir görðina, þá játaði Þórðr at göra, Eb. 24, cp. Ld. 308, Sturl. ii. 63; göra fé slíkt sem hann vildi, at undan-skildum hérað-sektum ok utanferðum, var þá handsalat niðrfall af sökum, Fs. 74; lúka upp gerð ( to deliver the arbitration), or segja upp gerð, to pronounce or to give verdict as umpire; skyldi Skapti gerð upp segja, Valla L. 225; hann lauk upp gerðum á Þórsness-þingi ok hafði við hina vitrustu menn er þar vóru komnir, Eb. 246; þeir skyldi upp lúka görðinni áðr en þeir færi af þingi, Bjarn. (fine); Þorsteinn kvaðsk ekki mundu görð upp lúka fyr en á nokkuru lögþingi, Fs. 49:—as to the number of umpires,—one only, a trustworthy man, was usually appointed, Eb. ch. 10 (Thord Gellir umpire), ch. 46, Lv. ch. 27 (Gellir), Valla L. ch. 6 (Skapti the speaker), Rd. ch. 6 (Áskell Goði), Sturl. 2. ch. 103 (Jón Loptsson), Sturl. 4. ch. 27 (Thorvald Gizurarson), Bjarn. 17 (the king of Norway), Flóam. S. ch. 3, Hallfr. S. ch. 10, Bjarn. 55: two umpires, Rd. ch. 10, 16, 18, 24, Valla L. ch. 10 (partly a case of sjálfdæmi), Bjarn. (fine): twelve umpires, Nj. ch. 75, 123, 124 (six named by each party): the number and other particulars not recorded, Vd. ch. 39, 40, Nj. ch. 94, Rd. ch. 11, 13, Eb. ch. 27, 56, Lv. ch. 4, 12, 30, Glúm. ch. 9, 23, 27, etc.:—even the sjálfdæmi (q. v.), self-judging, was a kind of arbitration, cp. Vápn. 31, Vd. ch. 29, 34, 44, Lv. ch. 17, Band. pp. 11–13, Ölk. ch. 2–4: curious is the passage, ek vil at vit takim menn til görðar með okkr, Hrafnkell svarar, þá þykisk þú jafn-menntr mér, Hrafn. 10:—görð is properly distinguished from dómr, but is sometimes confounded with it, vóru handsöluð mál í dóm ok menn til görðar nefndir, Lv. 13; málin kómu í dóm Vermundar, en hann lauk gerðum upp á Þórsness-þingi, Eb. 246; as also Nj. (beginning), where lögligir dómar no doubt refers to görð. A section of law about görð is contained in the Grág. at the end of Kaupa-þáttr, ch. 69–81 (i. 485–497), where even the curious case is provided for of one or all the umpires dying, or becoming dumb or mad, before pronouncing their verdict. ☞ This was a favourite way of settlement at the time of the Commonwealth, and suited well the sagacious and law-abiding spirit of the men of old: nor did the institution of the Fifth Court make any change in this; the görð was even resorted to in public matters, such as the introduction of Christianity in A. D. 1000. Good and leading men acted the part of public peacemakers (e. g. Njál in the 10th, Jón Loptsson in the 12th century); until at last, in the 13th century, the king of Norway was resorted to, but he misused the confidence put in him.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > GÖRÐ

  • 103 HALDA

    * * *
    (held; hélt, héldum; haldinn), v.
    I. with dat.
    1) to hold fast (Gunnarr var kyrr svá at honum hélt einn maðr);
    to keep back, restrain (Hrafn fekk eigi haldit henni heima);
    2) to withhold (héldu bœndrgjaldinu);
    3) to keep, retain (þú skalt jafhan þessu sæti halda);
    to preserve (halda virðingu sinni, lífi ok limum);
    halda vöku sinni, to keep oneself awake;
    4) to hold, keep one’s stock;
    also ellipt. (vetr var illr ok héldu menn illa);
    5) phrases, halda njósnum, to keep watch, to spy (= halda njósnum til um e-t);
    halda (hendi) fyrir auga, to hold (the hand) before the eyes, shade the eyes;
    halda hendi yfir e-m, to protect one;
    6) to hold, stand, steer, ellipt., þeir héldu aptr (held back again) um haustit;
    þeir héldu út eptir fírði, they stood out the firth;
    halda heim, to steer homewards;
    7) to graze, put in the field (halda fé til haga);
    8) impers. to continue, last (hélt því lengi um vetrinn);
    II. with acc.
    1) to hold in possession, a fief, land, estate (þeir héldu alla hina beztu staði með sjónum);
    2) to hold, keep, observe, a feast, holiday (í hvers minning heldr þú þenna. dag?);
    3) to keep (halda orð sín, eið, sættir, frið);
    to observe (halda guðs lög ok landsins);
    4) to uphold, maintain, support (halda vini sína, halda e-n til ríkis);
    5) halda sik, to comport oneself (kunna halda sik með hófi);
    halda sik ríkmannliga, to fare sumptuously;
    halda sik aptr af e-u, to abstain from;
    6) to hold, consider, deem (hón hélt engan hans jafningja);
    7) to hold, keep up;
    halda varnir, to keep up a defence;
    halda vörð, to keep watch;
    8) to hold, compel, bind (heldr mik þá ekki til útanferðar);
    þó heldr þik várkunn til at leita á, thou hast some excuse for trying;
    III. with preps.:
    halda á e-u, to hold, wield in the hand (halda á sverði);
    to hold to a thing, go on with it, be busy about (halda á drykkju, á ferð sinni, á sýslu);
    halda e-t af e-m, to hold (land, office) from or of one (þeir er höfðu haldið land af Danakonungi);
    halda mikit af e-m, to make much of one;
    halda eptir e-m, to pursue one;
    halda e-u eptir, to keep back;
    halda sik frá e-u, to keep oneself back from, refrain from;
    halda e-u fram, to uphold, support;
    halda e-u fyrir e-u, to withhold from one;
    to protect against (héldu engar grindr fénu fyrir birninum);
    halda e-n fyrir e-t, to hold, consider one to be so and so (síðan hélt konungr Erling fyrir tryggvan vin);
    halda í e-t, to hold fast, grasp (þú skalt halda í hurðarhringinn);
    halda til e-s, to be the cause of, be conducive to;
    heldr þar margt til þess, there are many reasons for this;
    hélt til þess (conduced to it) góðgirni hans;
    halda til e-s, to be bent on, fond of (halda mjök til skarts, til gleði);
    halda til jafns við e-n, to bear up against one, to be a match for one;
    halda um e-t, to grasp with the hand (= halda hendi um e-t);
    halda barni undir skírn, to hold at baptism;
    halda e-u upp, to hold aloft, lift (halda upp höndum);
    halda upp árum, to hold up the oars, cease pulling;
    to uphold, maintain, support (halda upp hofum, kristninni);
    to keep going (halda upp bardaga);
    to discharge (halda upp kostnaði, bótum);
    halda upp bœnum fyrir e-m, to pray for one;
    halda e-u við, to maintain a thing;
    halda við e-m, to stand against (hvar sem harm kom fram, hélt ekki við honum);
    hélt þá við atgöngu (acc.), they were near coming to fight;
    heldr nú við hót, it is little short of threats;
    IV. refl., haldast.
    * * *
    pret. hélt (= Goth. haihald), 2nd pérs. hélt, mod. hélzt, pl. héldum; pres. held, pl. höldum; pret. subj. héldi; part. haldinn; imperat. hald and haltú: [Ulf. haldan = βόσκειν, ποιμαίνειν, whereas he renders to keep, hold by other words; Hel. haldan = alere, fovere, colere, which thus seems to be the primitive sense of the word, and to be akin to Lat. cŏlo; again, A. S. healdan, Engl. hold, O. H. G. haltan, Germ. halten, Swed. hålla, halda, Dan. holde, are all of them used in a more general sense]:—to hold.
    A. WITH DAT. to hold to:
    I. to hold fast by; with the notion of restraint or force, tók Gizurr förunaut Ögmundar ok hélt honum, Sturl. i. 150; Gunnarr var kyrr svá at honum hélt einn maðr, Nj. 92; ef maðr heldr manni …, varðar fjörbaugs-garð, Grág. ii. 110; h. e-m undir drep, 17; h. skipum ( to grapple the ships) með stafnljám, Fms. ii. 315: to keep back, Hrafn fékk eigi haldit henni heima þar, Ísl. ii. 249; ok halda þeim veðr í enni sömu höfn, Grág. i. 92; h. (sér) í e-t, to hold oneself fast by, grasp, þú skalt h. í hurðar-hringinn, Dropl. 29; heldr sér í faxit, Sd. 177.
    β. so in the phrases, halda barni (manni) undir skírn, vatn, primsignan, biskups hönd, eccl. to hold a bairn ( man) at baptism, prima signatio, confirmation, Grág. i. 29; h. vatni (tárum), to hold one’s tears, 623. 56, Fms. viii. 232, vi. (in a verse); halda munni, to hold one’s tongue, be silent, vii. 227; halda tungu sinni, Þórð.
    2. to withhold; þá megu þeir h. tíundum hans í móti, K. Þ. K. 62; h. vætti, Grág. i. 42; h. gögnum, 56; ef goði heldr tylftar-kvið, er hann heldr kviðnum, 58; halda matinum fyrir honum, 47; h. sköttum fyrir e-m, Nj. 8; h. skógar-manni fyrir e-m, Finnb. 334; um þat er hann hefir konunni haldit, Grág. i. 313; héldu bændr gjaldinu, Fms. vii. 302; hélt ek því (i. e. the money) fyrir honum, i. e. paid it not, Ísl. ii. 244.
    II. to hold, of a rope or the like; sá maðr hugði h. mundu er festi, … ok h. mundu í slíku veðri, Grág. ii. 361; reip þau tíu er tveggja manna afli haldi hvert, id.; skal hann svá göra at haldi fyrir fyrnsku, 268.
    β. to hold, hold out, last; optast halda þar íllviðri litla hríð, Sks. 212; sunnudags-helgi ríss upp á laugardegi, ok heldr ( lasts) til mánadags, N. G. L. i. 138.
    III. to keep, retain, Germ. behalten; fá-ein skip héldu seglum sinum, Fms. x. 143; þú skalt jafnan þessu sæti h., Nj. 6; h. bústað sínum, Ld. 26; h. ríki sínu, Al. 58, Fms. i. 13; h. öllum Noregi, viii. 155; h. frelsi ok eignum, vi. 40; h. hlut sínum, to uphold one’s right, Eg. passim; halt sömum vinum sem ek hefi haft, Fas. i. 375; h. hreinleik sínum, Al. 58.
    β. to hold, keep safe, preserve; h. hlut sínum, Ld. 54; h. heilsu, Grág. i. 145; h. virðingu sinni, Ld. 16; þá heldr hann kosti sínum, Grág. ii. 209; h. tíma ( honour) sínum, Al. 59; h. lífi ok limum, Eg. 89; h. lífinu, Nj. 111; h. trúnaði sínum, 109; vináttu sinni, Ld. 200; einorð sinni, Fb. ii. 265; h. sér réttum, to keep oneself right, Ld. 158; h. e-m heilum, Odd. 30; h. ríki fyrir e-m, Fms. v. 279; h. manna-forræði fyrir e-m, Hrafn. 19; h. réttu máli fyrir e-m, Fms. vii. 64.
    2. to continue to keep, keep all along; h. teknum hætti, Fms. iv. 254; h. vöku, to keep oneself awake, Ld. 152; but h. vöku fyrir e-m, to keep another awake; halda sýslu sinni, Fs. 36; h. högum, to keep grazing, Eb. 104, Ld. 148.
    3. to hold, keep one’s stock; ellipt., vetr var íllr ok héldu menn ílla, the winter was cold and it was ill to keep live stock, Sturl. ii. 143, (cp. fjár-höld); hann hélt vel svá at nær lifði hvat-vetna, Hrafn. 22: metaph., ílla hefir þinn faðir þá haldit, Fms. xi. 144; öld hefir ílla haldit, the people have had a sad loss, vi. (in a verse); h. fangi, and also ellipt. halda, of sheep and cattle, opp. to ‘to go back.’
    4. phrases, halda njósnum, to keep watch, to spy, Fms. viii. 146, Nj. 113; hann hélt njósnum til Önundar, Landn. 287; hélt konungr njósnum til, ef …, Fms. vii. 128; hann skyldi h. njósnum til ok gera orð konungi, i. 54; h. njósnum til um e-t, iv. 119, Nj. 93; halda njósn (sing.) um skip þat, Eg. 74; þér haldit njósnum nær færi gefr á Arnkatli, Eb. 186; hann lét h. njósnum uppi á landi, Fms. vii. 316; hann hélt fréttum til, ef …, iv. 349.
    β. halda (hendi) fyrir auga, to hold ( the hand) before the eyes, shade the eyes, Nj. 132, Fms. v. 196; h. fyrir munn e-m, to hold ( the hand) over one’s mouth; h. hendi yfir e-m, to hold the hand over one, protect one, Nj. 266, Fbr. 22, Korm.; h. hendi um háls e-m, to clasp the hands around one’s neck, Fms. i. 9; h. skildi fyrir e-n, to hold the shield for one as a second in a duel, Ísl. ii. 257, passim; h. e-m til náms, to hold one to the book, make one study, K. Þ. K. 56; h. e-m til virðingar, Ld. 98.
    IV. ellipt. (liði, skipi, för, stefnu, etc. understood), to hold, stand in a certain direction, esp. as a naut. term; þeir héldu aptr ( stood back again) um haustið, Eg. 69; treystisk hann eigi á haf at halda, Eb. 6; héldu þeir vestr um haf, id.; stigu þeir á skip sín, ok héldu út ( stood out) eptir firði, Fms. i. 63; þeir héldu þat sama sumar til Íslands, Ld. 6; hann hélt upp eptir hinni eystri kvísl, Fms. vii. 55; h. heim, to hold one’s course, stand homewards, Odd. 30; h. á braut, Grág. i. 92; Hrútr hélt suðr til Eyrar-sunds, Nj. 8; h. eptir e-m, to pursue one, 7; h. undan, to fly, Fms. x. 396, Nj. 98 (on land); kom móti þeim sunnan-veðr með myrkri, ok urðu þeir fyrir at h., to lay one’s course for the wind, A. A. 271; h. útleið, to stand on the outer tack, Eg. 78; h. til, to turn against, attack (on sea), Fms. xi. 72; hélt hann liði sínu suðr á Mæri, i. 62; þeir héldu liði sínu norðr til Þrándheims, id.; Haraldr konungr hélt norðan liði sínu, Eg. 32; héldu þeir skipi því suðr með landi, 69; skipi því lét hann halda vestr til Englands, id.; Unnr hélt skipinu í Orkneyjar, eptir þat hélt Unnr skipi sínu til Færeyja, Ld. 8.
    β. to graze, put in the field, of sheep, cattle; þykkir mér þat miklu skipta at þeim sé vel til haga haldit, Eg. 714; hvert Steinarr hafði látið nautum sínum halda, 715; ok bað hann h. nautunum annan veg, 716.
    γ. phrases, halda kyrru fyrir, to hold still, remain quiet, Ld. 216, Þórð. 30 new Ed., Nj. 223, 258; Hallr heldr nú til fangs ( went fishing) sem áðr, Ld. 38.
    V. with prep.; halda á e-u, to hold, wield in the hand, freq. in mod. usage, h. á bók, penna, fjöðr, hníf, skærum, nál, etc.; hafði hverr þat er hélt á, Nj. 279; h. á sverði, Fb. i. 33; hann tók við öxinni ok hélt (viz. á), ok sá á, Eg. 180: to hold fast, heldr nú maðr á manni, Fas. i. 12; eigi máttu helvítis byrgi h. á honum, 656 C. 6; ef hann heldr á fénu ( withholds it), Grág. i. 427.
    β. [Germ. anhalten], to hold to a thing, go on with, be busy about; h. á sýslu, to be busy, Rm. 14; h. á keri, qs. halda á drykkju, to go on drinking, carousing, Hm. 18: h. á hinni sömu bæn, Stj. 417; h. á fyrirsátrum við e-n, Þórð. 51 new Ed.; h. á búnaði sínum, Ld. 164; hélt hann þá á búnaði sínum sem skjótligast, Fms. ix. 215, x. 119, Sturl. ii. 245; þogar á bak Jólum hélt Ólafr konungr á búningi, Fms. v. 41; hann heldr nú á málinu, Nj. 259; nú heldr Þórðr á málinu ok verðr Oddný honum gipt, Bjarn. 11, Konr. (Fr.); h. á tilkalli, Fms. i. 84; h. á þessum sið, xi. 41; h. á för, to go on with one’s journey, Sighvat; gengu síðan brott ok héldu á ferð sinni, and went on their journey, Sturl.;—whence the mod. phrase, halda áfram, to go on, which seems not to occur in old writers.
    2. halda e-u fram, to hold up, make much of; bróðir minn mun mér mjök hafa fram haldit fyrir ástar sakir, Nj. 3.
    β. to hold on doing, (hence fram-hald, continuation); halda fram upp-teknu efni, Fms. i. 263; slíku hélt hann fram meðan hann lifði, iv. 254; hélt hann (fram) teknum hætti um veizlurnar, id., Grett. 14.
    3. halda saman, to hold together, Eluc. 6, Fms. vii. 140, Rb. 340.
    4. halda e-u upp, to hold aloft, Yngvarr hélt upp vísu þeirri, Eg. 152; steinninn heldr upp annarr öðrum, Rb. 390; h. upp árum, to hold up the oars, cease pulling, Fas. ii. 517, N. G. L. i. 65.
    β. to uphold, maintain, support; halda upp hofi, Landn. 64, Eb. 24; h. upp hofum ok efla blót, Fms. i. 91; h. upp kirkju, K. Þ. K. 52; h. upp Kristninni, Fms. i. 32: to keep going, h. upp bardaga, orrostu, xi. 66, 188, 340.
    γ. to discharge; h. upp féráns-dómi, Grág. i. 120; h. upp lögskilum, 145; h. upp svörum, Ó. H. 174; h. upp kostnaði, Eg. 77; h. upp gjaldi, Grág. i. 384; gjöldum, Fms. i. 81; h. upp bót, Grág. ii. 182; bótum, Eb. 100, 162, N. G. L. i. 311; ef hann heldr upp yfirbót ( penance) þeirri, Hom. 70; h. upp bænum fyrir e-m, to pray for one, Fms. xi. 271; hélt hann því vel upp sem vera átti, discharged it well, x. 93.
    δ. halda sér vel upp, to hold oneself well up, Sturl.
    ε. metaph., skal-at hann lögvillr verða, svá at honum haldi þat uppi (i. e. went unpunished), Grág. i. 316; ok heldr honum þat uppi ( that will save him), ef hann er rétt-hafi at orðinn, ii. 242.
    5. halda e-u við, to maintain a thing, Hkr. i. 195.
    VI. impers.,
    1. to continue, last; hélt því nokkura stund dags, Fms. x. 125: hélt því lengi um vetrinn, Ld. 288; regni hélt haustnótt gegnum, Fms. vi. 83.
    2. with prep. við, to be on the brink of; hélt þá við atgöngu, they were within a hair’s breadth of coming to fight, Hkr. i. 143; hélt þá við vandræði, Fms. ix. 434; heldr við bardaga, vi. 8; heldr nú við hót, it is little short of a threat, i. 305; hélt við blót, x. 106; ok hélt við flótta, i. 174; hélt við meiðingar, Nj. 21, Sd. 143; henni hélt við, at hón mundi drepa hana, Nj. 118; þeim hélt við váða sjálfan, Ó. H. 168; konungi hélt við, hvárt hann mundi standask eðr eigi, Mag. 100; honum hélt við kafnan, Bs. i. 18; hélt þó við at þeir mundi berjask, Fs. 53.
    B. WITH ACC. to hold:
    I. to hold in possession, a fief, land, estate, office, or the like; þeir héldu alla hina beztu staði með sjónum, Fms. xi. 131; þeir er áðr höfðu haldit land af Dana-konungi, i. 232; Eirekr skyldi h. land af Aðalsteini konungi, 23; Vemundr hélt Firða-fylki, Eg. 12; hélt hann þat ríki undir Knút konungi, Ísl. ii. 242; í þeirri borg héldu þeir langfeðgar fimmtán konungdóma, Ver. 37; h. land sem leigu-land, Grág. ii. 278; konungrinn heldr af Guði nafnit, Sks. 599 B; prestar er kirkjur halda, H. E. i. 486; sá prestr er heldr Pétrs-kirkju, N. G. L. i. 312; presta þeirra er kirkju halda, 346; skal sá maðr ráða er kirkju heldr, K. Þ. K. 60; Ólafs kirkju þá er Væringjar halda (the parish church of W.), Hkr. iii. 408.
    2. halda ábyrgju, ábyrgð á e-n, to have the responsibility of a thing, Grág. ii. 399, K. Þ. K. 66; h. grip, to be in the possession of, Grág. i. 438, ii. 190; h. skóla, to keep a school, Mar.; h. fylgð, to perform, Fms. ix. 279; eiga vandræði at h., to be in a strait, difficulty, Eb. 108.
    II. to hold, keep, observe, a feast, holiday, or the like; halda kirkju-dag, K. Þ. K. 42; í hvers minning heldr þú þenna dag? Nj. 157; h. helgan þvátt-dag hvern, Pr. 437; h. helga daga, Sl.; h. Jóla-dag, Páska, Hvíta-sunnu, Rb. 134; minnstú að h. helgan hvíldar-daginn Drottins Guðs þíns (the Fourth Commandment in the Icel. version); h. heilagt, to keep holiday, Dipl. ii. 14; í dag þá hátíð höldum vér til himna sté vor Herra, Hólabók 54; er Júdar héldu hátíðligt, Stj. 110; (hence forn-haldinn, time-honoured): of the day-marks (vide dagr, p. 95), er þaðan haldinn miðr-morgin, Hrafn. 9.
    2. to keep; halda orð sín, to keep one’s word, Fms. x. 95; höldum öll einka-mál vár, vii. 305; h. sættir, Nj. 57; gerðú svá vel, félagi, at þú halt vel sætt þessa, 111, Sturl. iii. 153, Fs. 65, Gullþ. 20; hann kvaðsk vilja hafa svardaga af þeim ok festu, at halda, Nj. 164; h. eið, Sturl. iii. 153; h. frið, to keep peace, Greg. 7; ef þú vilt nokkura hluti eigi h. þá er ek hefi á lagt við þik, Eg. 738: to observe faith, law, rite, etc., halda átrúnað, Fms. i. 34, x. 277; h. Guðs lög ok landsins, vii. 305; h. lands lög, viii. 155; h. ein lög, 625. 52; hafa ok halda þau lög, Fms. i. 34; h. Kristilega trú, K. Á. 74; h. mál (orð) e-s, Greg. 17; h. alla hluti með athugasamlegu minni, Sks. 439.
    3. to keep, tend; halda geitr, Hkv. 2. 20 (exactly as in Gothic).
    III. to uphold, maintain, support; þykkir mér þér sé nú ísjár-vert, hvárt þú munt fá haldit þik eðr eigi, Nj. 155; munu vér þó ekki einhlitir at h. oss eptir þessi verk, Háv. 50; at hón mætti með valdi h. sik ok menn sína, Fas. i. 375; þat væri nokkurr várkunn, at þú héldir frænda þinn eðr fóstbróður, en þetta er alls engi (at) halda útlaga konungs, Ó. H. 145; enda ætla ek lítinn viljann til at h. vini þína, Fms. vii. 244; því at Eysteinn konungr kenndi Inga konungi, at hann héldi þá menn, 248; ef þú heldr hann ( upholdest him) til þess at ganga á vini mína, Eg. 339; viljum vér allir fylgja þér ok þik til konungs halda, Fms. i. 34; Stephanus skyldi h. hann til laga ok réttinda, Sks. 653; h. e-n til ríkis, Fb. i. 236; vinsæld föður hans hélt hann mest til alþýðu vináttu, Fms. vii. 175; þeir sem upp h. ( sustain) þenna líkama, Anecd. 4.
    β. phrases, halda e-m kost, borð, to keep at board, entertain, Fms. ix. 220, x. 105, 146, Nj. 6; or, halda e-n at klæðum ok drykk, Ó. H. 69; h. stríð, bellum gerere (not class.), Fms. x. 51; h. úfrið, Fas. ii. 539.
    2. halda sik, to comfort oneself, Sks. 281, Hom. 29; kunna sik með hófi at h., Sturl. iii. 108; h. sik ríkmannliga, to fare sumptuously, Ld. 234; hann hélt betr húskarla sína en aðrir, Fms. vii. 242; h. mjök til skarts, to dress fine, Ld. 196; þar var Hrefna ok hélt allmjök til skarts, id.; hann var hægr hvers-dagliga, ok hélt mjök til gleði, Sturl. iii. 123; hélt hann hér mjök til vinsælda ok virðinga, he enjoyed much popularity and fame, Ld. 298.
    β. ellipt. (sik understood), at h. til jafns við e-n, to bear up against one, to be a match for one, Ld. 40; ef þér hefir eigi til þess hug eðr afl at h. til jafns við e-n húskarl Þorsteins, Eg. 714; h. til fullnaðar, to stand on one’s full rights; ef þær taka eigi fullrétti, eðr h. eigi til fullnaðar, Grág. ii. 109; h. fullara, to hold one above other men, Ó. H. (in a verse); lét konungr þá h. mjök til ( make great preparations) at syngja messu hátíðliga, Hkr. i. 287.
    3. to hold forth, put forward; at þeim inyiidi þungbýlt vera í nánd honum, ef þeir héldi nokkurn annan fyrir betra mann en hann, Ld. 26; síðan hélt konungr Erling fyrir tryggvan mann, Fms. ix. 399.
    β. to hold, deem, be of opinion; the old writers seem not to use the word exactly in this sense, but near to it come such phrases as, hón hélt engan hans jafningja innan hirðar hvárki í orðum né öðrum hlutum, i. e. she held him to be above all men, Ld. 60; halda menn hann fyrir konung, Fb. i. 216; still closer, halda menn at Oddný sé nú betr gipt, Bjarn. 12 (but only preserved in a paper MS.): this sense is very freq. in mod. usage, to hold, mean, eg held það; eg held ekki, I think not; (hence hald, opinion.)
    γ. phrases, halda mikit upp á e-n, to hold one in much esteem, love, Stj. 33; halda af e-m, id., Fas. i. 458, ii. 63, 200, iii. 520, esp. freq. in mod. usage, (upp-á-hald, af-hald, esteem.)
    4. to hold on, keep up; halda varnir, to keep up a defence, Sks. 583; halda vörð, to keep watch, Eg. 120, Grág. i. 32, 264; halda njósn, Eg. 72, 74, Fms. xi. 46; halda tal af e-m, to speak, communicate with one, ii. 88.
    5. to hold, be valid, be in force, a law term; á sú sekt öll at halda, Grág. i. 89; á þat at h. allt er þeir urðu á sáttir, 86; enda á þat at h. með þeim síðan, ii. 336.
    IV. to hold, compel, bind (with the notion of obligation or duty); heldr mik þá ekki til utan-ferðar, Nj. 112; þó heldr þik várkunn til at leita á, i. e. thou art excused, thou hast some excuse in trying, 21; var auðsætt hvat til hélt um sættir, Bjarn. 70; þik heldr eigi hér svá mart, at þú megir eigi vel bægja héraðs-vist þinni, Eb. 252; þar mælir þú þar, er þik heldr várkunn til at mæla, Nj. 227; ek mun vera vinr hans, ok alla þá, er at mínum orðum láta, halda til vináttu við hann, i. e. I will be his friend, and all those who lend ear to my words I will hold to friendship with him, Eg. 18.
    2. halda sik frá e-u, to keep oneself from, to refrain from a thing, Sks. 276 B; h. sik frá munaðlífi, Post. 656 A. ii. 16, Hom. 53, 135; h. sik aptr af e-u, to abstain from, Hkr. i. 512.
    V. absol. to be the cause of, be conducive to a thing; heldr þar margt til þess, there are many reasons for this, Nj. 192; vildim vér vita hvat til heldr, Fms. vii. 106; en hann vissi eigi hvat til hafði haldit, er hann kom eigi, xi. 11; margir hlutir héldu til þess, Eg. 38; þat hélt til þess, at …, Al. 94; hélt til þess ( conduced to it) góðgirnd hans, stórmennska ok vitsmunir, Fs. 29; hefir þat mjök til haldit, er ek hefi svá lengi dvalizt, at ek ætlaða, Ld. 32; hann lét bæði til h. vingan ok mágsemd, Fs. 24; heldr þat mest til at þá var komit útfall sjávar, Ld. 56; hélt þat mest til þess, at hann gafsk bezt í öllum mannraunum, 60; þat eitt hélt til, at þeir fóru eigi málum á hendr Þórði, at þeir höfðu eigi styrk til, 138.
    VI. to hold, comprise; sólar-öld heldr tuttugu ok átta ár, Rb. 510; h. skor (of weight), Grág. i. 500.
    ☞ In some instances the use of dat. and acc. wavers, e. g. halda húsum, to keep up the houses, Grág. ii. 278, 335; h. hliði, to keep the gate in repair, 265; but halda hlið (acc.), 332: to keep, observe, h. lögum, griðum, boðorðum, Glúm. 333, Grág. i. 357, ii. 166, 623. 28; hélt hann þessu sumu, Fms. x. 416 (Ágrip); halda ílla orðum, vii. (in a verse); þeir er því þingi áttu at h., Glúm. 386; h. sáttum, St. 17; h. eiðum, Bkv. 18; Gizuri þótti biskup h. ríkt ( protect strongly) brennu-mönnum, Sturl. i. 201 C; Guð er sínum skepnum heldr (keeps, protects) ok geymir, Mar.; þá hélt engi kirkju mönnum, … kept no man safe, Fms. ix. 508; h. njósn (acc.) um e-t, Eg. 74; h. til njósn, 72; njósnir, Fms. xi. 46. In most of these instances the acc. is the correct case, and the dat. is due either to careless transcribers or incorrect speaking: in some instances an enclitic um has been taken for a dative inflexion, thus e. g. sáttum haldi in Stor. l. c. is to be restored to sátt um haldi; eiðum haldit in Bkv. l. c. to eið (for eiða) um haldit; in others the prep. um has caused the confusion, as ‘halda njósn um at’ has been changed into halda njósnum at. But in the main the distinction between the use of dat. and acc. is fixed even at the present time: the acc. seems to represent the more primitive usage of this verb, the dat. the secondary.
    C. REFLEX.:
    I. to hold oneself, to stay; héldusk þeir þá ekki fyrir norðan Stað, Fms. i. 63; mátti hann eigi þar haldask, Landn. 246; h. á baki, to keep oneself on horseback, keep one’s seat, Grág. ii. 95; munu þeir skamma stund hér við haldask, Nj. 247: to be kept, remain, þá skal hann h. með Helju, Edda 39: to resist, megu vér ekki við h. fyrir ofreflis-mönnum þessum, Nj. 254; hélzk þá ekki við honum, Eg. 289; mann er svá hefir haldisk við höfuð-syndum, Hom. 157.
    β. to hold out, last, continue; ok hélzk ferillinn, Eg. 579; hélzk undr þetta allt til dags, Nj. 272 (twice); hélzk konungdómr í kyni hans, Rb. 394; lengi síðan hélzk bruna-öld með Svíum, Yngl. S.; lengi hélzk þat í ætt þeirri, at …, Eg. 770; hélzk vinátta með þeim, Nj. 66; þat hefir enn haldizk í ætt hans, Fms. iv. 8; ok hefir þat haldizk ( it has continued to be so) síðan er ek hefi hann séð, Ld. 174; honum haldisk (imperat.) sigr ok langt líf, Ver. 57; betr þætti mér, at hún héldisk þér, that it (the luck) would hold out for thee, Fb. ii. 74; ef hann helzk í útrú sinni, if he perseveres in his untruth, 623. 26.
    γ. to be kept safe and sound; menn allir héldusk ( all bands were saved) ok svá fé, Ld. 8, Fs. 143; þar héldusk menn allir ok mestr hluti fjár, Eg. 405; hafði fé vel haldizk, has been well kept, done well, Ld. 34.
    δ. to be valid, stand; eigu þau handsöl hennar at haldask, Grág. i. 334; engi má haldask dómr hans, Edda 15; skyldu þau (the truce) haldask um þingit, Nj. 348.
    2. impers., mér helzk, e-m helzk vel, ílla, á e-u, to have a good hold, have luck with a thing; mér helzk lítt á sauða-mönnum, Grett. 110 A.
    3. recipr., haldask á, to hold or pull one against another, wrestle, (hence á-höld); var sagt Magnúsi, at þeir héldisk á úti, that they were fighting outside, Sturl. ii. 44.
    II. part. pass. haldinn, [Dan. holden], so ‘holden,’ in such and such a state; vel haldinn, in good condition, faring well, well to do, Eg. 20, 234; hugðusk þar ok haldnir ( safe) mundu vera, Ver. 34; þungliga h., very sick, Eg. 565, Hkr. ii. 199; vel haldinn, doing well; tak heldr annat fé, svá mikit, at þú þykisk vel haldinn af, i. e. fully satisfied, having got full redress, Boll. 350; Sveinn sagði, at hann vill hafa tvá hluti fjárins, Hrani sagðisk ekki af því haldinn ( satisfied) vera, Fms. iv. 31: in the phrase, heilu ok höldnu, safe and sound, Bs. i. 191, Fms. xi. 376, Hkr. i. 319; með höldnu hljóði, preserving the sound, Skálda 175.
    2. ok mun þykkja sér misboðit ef þú ert haldinn (kept, protected), Finnb. 344.
    β. kept, observed, Fms. xi. 99.
    γ. held in custody, in prison, Bs. i. 419, Sturl. i. 151.
    III. gerund., haldandi, holding good, valid; sá dómr er eigi haldandi, is not valid, K. Á. 304; af öllu afli er friðr haldandi, Hom. 5.
    2. part. act., með upp haldandi höndum, with uplifted hands, Bs. i. 684.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > HALDA

  • 104 LYRITR

    (gen. -ar), m. veto, interdict; verja e-t lýriti, to put a veto on, forbid by law.
    * * *
    m., or better lýritr or lýrittr, gen. lyritar (but lyrits, Grág. ii. 233), dat. lyriti, plur. lyritar. N. G. L. ii. 94, Jb. 193; the quantity cannot be ascertained because the vellums do not distinguish between long and short vowels; it is spelt with one t throughout the Grág. (Kb.); the alliterative phrase lagalyritr, as also the invariable spelling in the Grágás, shew that the word had no initial h. Former attempts at an etymology, from læ and rifta (Björn á Skarðsá), hlýrar and réttir (Pal Vídal.), lygi and rift (Fritzner), must be dismissed; tiie spelling lyriftar, which once or twice occurs in Norse MSS. of the 14th century (N. G. L. i. 394, ii. 94, v. l. 19), is probably a mere corruption. Lyritr is a compd word from lög, law, and rör or reyr, a landmark, which word in the old Swed. law exactly answers to lyrit in the Norse law; lyrit is thus qs. lý-ryr-ti, by assimilation and by weakening the y into i, lyritti; the t being inflexive: its literal sense, therefore, is a lawful rör or landmark. In Sweden there were often five mark-stones, but it is added (Schlyter iii. s. v. rör)—fiuri stenar oc þri stenar mughu rör heta = four stones and even three stones may be called rör, i. e. make a ‘law-rör,’ a lawful landmark, a lyrit; this, we believe, is the etymology of this much-contested word. About the gender (masc., not fem.) there can be no doubt, from the numerous instances in the Grágás; but in the 13th century the word began to become neuter, thus we have lyritit, Grág. (Kb.) i. 103, lines 14 and 21, but lyritinn several times in the same page: nom. lyriti in Grág. (Sb.) ii. 226; and elalausu lyriti, Nj. passim.
    B. SENSE:
    I. prop. when the boundary of a field or estate was to be drawn, the law prescribed that a mark-stone (mark-steinn) should be raised on the spot, and three other stones laid beside it; these three stones were called landmark-stones (lyrit-steinar or lyritar); by their number and position they were distinguished from all other stones in the field, see N. G. L. ii. 94, cp. note 19 (Jb. 193).
    II. metaph. in the Icel. law, a full title of possession, lawful claim to right or property; thus defined by Konrad Maurer—‘Lyrit bedeutet in der Grágás und in den ältern Sagas, das volle Eigentums-recht, oder auch den Bann, der dem Grunde gentümer zum Schutze seines Eigentumes, dem Goden aber Kraft seiner Amtsgewalt zusteht:’
    1. the earliest kind was probably the land-lyrit or ‘land-ban;’ this law term was originally borrowed from the mark-stones themselves, and then came to mean a full title to land, field, pasture, or estate, Grág. ii. 224, 225:—eignar-lyritr, full lawful possession, a legal title of ownership; hafa eignar-lyrit fyrir landi, 204, 222.
    2. a veto; Goða-lyritr, the veto of a Goði ( Priest), forbidding the court or neighbours to deliver a sentence or verdict in a case, and thus quashing the suit. A Goði alone, by virtue of his office, was entitled to stop a court in this way, whether personally or by one of his liegemen, so that if any one else wished thus to stop a suit, he had first to go to his liegelord (Goði) and be authorised by him to do so; cp. the phrases, taka lyrit af Goða, selja lyrit, ef Goði færir lyrit sinn sjálfr fram, and similar law phrases, Grág. i. 109–111, cp. esp. Þ. Þ. ch. 38; neglect of this was contempt of court, punishable by the lesser outlawry. The word lyritr occurs at every step in the Grágás, esp. in the phrase, verja lyriti, or verja e-t lyriti, to defend through a lyrit, i. e. to put under veto, to vindicate one’s right, forbid, or the like; eigi varðar hagabeit, nema lyriti sé varið, Grág. ii. 224; verja lyriti haga, 225; þótt maðr veri fleirum lyriti (dat.), 226, Nj.; láta lyrit koma fyrir sök, to stop on a case, Grág. i. 109; kaupa land lagn kaupi ok lyritar, to buy land by a lawful bargain and with full tide of possession, ii. 213; eptir þat nefndi Þorkéll sér vátta, ok setti (varði?) þeim lyriti, ok fyrirbauð þeim at dæma, Lv. 31; ok er únýt stefna hans eðr lyriti (lyritr?), Grág. ii. 226; hann (the Goði) skal nefna sér vátta, áðr hann færi lyrit fram, í þat vætti, at ek ver lyriti, goða-lyriti, löglyriti fullum dómendum at dæma um sök þá … enda skal hann svá verja kviðmönnum lyriti, at bera kviðu um hann, i. 111; ek ver lyriti mínum, löglyriti dómendum at dæma, id.; færa lyrit sinn fram, to utter one’s veto, id.; fara með land-lyriti, ii. 225.
    COMPDS: lyritareiðr, lyritarvarzla, lyritarvörn.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > LYRITR

  • 105 RÁÐA

    (ræð; réð, réðum; ráðinn), v.
    1) to advise, counsel, ráða e-m e-t (réðu vinir hans honum þat, at hann berðist eigi við þik);
    ráða e-m ráð, to give one counsel;
    2) to consult about, discuss, with dat. (ráða landráðum);
    ráða ráðum sínum, to hold a conference;
    3) to devise, plan;
    þeir ráða atför við Gunnar, thev plan an onslaught on G.;
    réð hón þeim bana, she plotted that man’s death;
    4) to plot or cause one’s death, = ráða e-m bana (þær atluðu, at konungr mundi hafa ráðit hann);
    Reginn mik réð, R. betrayed me;
    réðu þeir þat þá með sér, they settled this among themselves;
    6) to fix, decide, resolve, with acc.;
    ek hefi áðr ráðit brúðlaup mitt, I have fixed my wedding day;
    réðu þeir þá þat at fara ofan til Rangár, then they resolved to ride down to Rang river;
    ráða e-t til staðar, to settle, fix definitively, = staðráða e-t (vil ek finna konung áðr en ek ráða þetta til staðar);
    7) to hire, take into service (ráða skipverja, ráða sér hjón);
    bóndi sagði húsfreyju, at hann hafði Hrapp ráðit með sér, that he had taken H. into his company;
    8) to rule, govern, with dat. (ráða landi, ríki; Einarr jarl ráð þá Orkneyjum);
    9) to rule, command, have one’s way, prevail, decide, settle (skal hón sjálf ráða hvárt hón vill hann eða eigi);
    skal ráða afl með þeim, the majority shall decide;
    Ólafr bað móður sína. eina ráða, to settle the matter alone;
    landfall ræðr fyrir sunnan, makes the boundary towards the south;
    with dat., hvárt ræðr þú því, er, is it your doing that..?;
    ráða engu, to have no authority, be of no avail (orðheill þín skal engu ráða);
    ráða landamerkjum, to make the boundary (Hafslœkr réð þar landamerkjum);
    ráða búi sínu, to conduct, manage one’s estate;
    hann réð sér sjálfr, he was independent;
    ertu nökkurs ráðandi hér, have you any authority here?
    10) to have, possess, be master of, enjoy;
    ráða fé ok fjörvi, to enjoy wealth and life;
    11) to explain, read;
    ráða gátu, to read a riddle;
    ráða draum, to interpret a dream;
    ráða e-t at líkindum, to judge from probabilities (engar munu fríðari en þínar dœtr, ef at líkindum skal ráða);
    12) to read and understand (ráða rúnar, stafi, rit);
    réð ek þær rúnar, er reist þín systir, I have read the runes thy sister engraved;
    13) to punish, chastise, with dat. (fóstri hans var harðr við hann ok réð honum mjök);
    ráða stórt, to aim high, undertake great things;
    15) periphrastically with an infin., to do;
    ráðumk ganga, we (I) do go;
    hón réð vakna (= hón vaknaði), she awoke;
    þau lög, er hann réð upp at segja, the laws which he pronounced;
    16) with preps.:
    ráða e-t af, to resolve, make up one’s mind (réð hann þat af at sigla súðr til Danmerkr);
    to discontinue, put a stop to (ek hygg, at Þóroddr ætli nú at af ráða hingatkvámur þínar);
    to do away with (þú verðr nú þetta vandræði af at ráða);
    ráða e-n af e-u, to make one leave off (af hefir þú mik ráðit brekvísi við þik);
    ráða e-u af (e-u), to get off;
    Þ. bað menn taka forka ok ráða af skipinu, to get the ship off, set her afloat;
    ráða e-n af = ráða e-n af lífi, af dögum, to put out of the way, put to death (hann kvazt mundu af ráða illmenni þessi);
    ráða at e-m, to attack (njósnarmenn hlupu upp ok réðu at þeim);
    ráða á e-t, to set about a thing (þeir réðu á íshöggit);
    ráða á e-n, to attack one (þorðu aldri úvinir hans á hann at ráða);
    ráða bót (bœtr) á e-u, to remedy, make good (þóttust menn eigi kunna bœtr á þessu ráða);
    ráða eptir e-m, to pursue one;
    ráða e-n frá e-u, to deprive one of, exclude one from (ráða e-n frá landi, ríki);
    ráða fyrir e-u, to command, have authority over, be master of (ráða fyrir skipi, hofi, fé, eldi);
    ráða í e-t, to guess at, find out (Gormr konungr réð ekki í þetta);
    ráða móti, í móti e-m, to attack one (í móti Kára réð Mörðr);
    ráða e-n ofan, to overthrow;
    ráða ór e-u, to find an expedient, solve a difficulty (er nú vant ór at ráða);
    ráða til e-s, to rush in upon, attack (hann reiddi upp øxina ok réð til Þórvarðs); to take to (set about) a thing, try, make an attempt;
    S. kom fótum undir sik, ok réð til í annat sinn, and tried again the second time;
    ok er nú til at ráða, ef þér vilit, now is the time for action, if you are willing;
    skal ráða til árinnar eða eigi, shall we try to pass the river or not?;
    ráða til orrostu, to go to battle;
    ráða til uppgöngu, to make an ascent;
    ráða til ferðar, to start on a journey;
    ráða skipi til hlunns, to draw a ship on to land;
    ráða um e-t, to dispose of (megum vér eigi ráða um hennar gjaforð);
    to deliberate on (konungr gaf jarli orlof at ráða um þetta við menn sina);
    ráða um at gøra e-t, to be about to do a thing (hann tók um strenginn ok réð um at fara upp í skipit);
    ráða um við e-n, to put an end to, finish off (var Alfr þá kominn ok ætlaði skjótt um at ráða við Finnboga);
    ráða e-t or e-u undan e-m, to deprive one of (hón vildi eigi giptast, því at hón vildi eigi ráða fé undan dóttur sinni);
    ráða e-t undir e-n, to put in the charge of (þá réðu þeir goðorð sitt undir Rafn);
    ráða e-t upp, to read up (þessi sömu bréf lét erkibiskup upp ráða í Danmörku);
    ráða við e-n, to be able to master one (muntu nú einn við mik ráða);
    ráða e-t við sik, to make up one’s mind;
    ráða yfir e-u, to rule, govern;
    17) refl., ráðast.
    * * *
    pres. ræð, ræðr, ræð; pl. ráðum, ráðit, ráða; pret. réð, 2nd pers. rétt, réttu, rhymed with hætta, Fms. vi. (in a verse); mod. réðst, pl. réðu; subj. réði; imper. ráð, ráddú; part. ráðinn; a middle form ráðumk, Hom. 113; a weak pret. indic. réði occurs in the poem Jd. 35 (ótrauðr á haf réði), and in prose, Fms. i. 223, and is freq. in mod. usage (eg réði honum að bíða … hann réði því ekki): [a word common to all Teut. languages; A. S. ræðan; Old Engl. rede and read; Germ. rathen; Dan. raade; the Goth. has rêdan, but it is rarely used in Ulf.]
    A. To advise, counsel, with dat. of the thing and acc. of the person; ráða e-m e-t, réðu vinir hans honum þat, at hann berðisk eigi við þik, Nj. 33; réðu honum þat allir at samna liði. Eg. 9; ráða e-m ráð, to give one counsel, Vþm. 1; ráðumk þér, Hm. 113 sqq.; þat ræð ek þér, Sdm. 22 sqq., Nj. 61; makligr ertú þeirra, segir Njáll, ok réð honum ráðin, 71; ráð er þér ráðit, Fm. 21; ráða e-m heilræði, Nj. 85.
    2. to consult; ráða ráðum sínum, to hold a conference, Edda 26, Fms. vii. 259; vóru opt á tali ok ráða-stefnu ok réðu landráðum, i. 52.
    3. to devise; þá menn er konu hafa numit eða þat hafa ráðit, Grág. i. 354, Gullþ. 14.
    4. to fix, decide, determine, resolve, with acc.; ek hefi áðr ráðit brúðlaup mitt, Nj. 4; ráða samband, Gullþ. 14; ráða atför við Gunnar, Nj. 1, 7; réðu þeir þat þá með sér, 93; hefi ek ráðit honum kvánfang, 151; siðan réð Gunnarr utanferð sína með honum, 41, cp Sturl. ii. 168; ráða e-m ró, Ls. 55:—ráða e-t af, to form a decision, Eg. 337; en af verðr at ráða nokkut ór hverju vandræði, Lv. 39:—ráða e-t við sik, to make up one’s mind; hvárt hann vildi þar vera eða fara til Íslands, hann kvaðsk eigi þat hafa ráðit við sik, Nj. 123:—ráða um e-t, to deliberate; hann gaf jarli orlof at ráða um þetta kjör við menn sína, Ó. H. 97:—ráða e-t (or e-u) til staðar, to settle, fix definitely, Fms. ii. 78, Ld. 178:—ráða ór, ráða ór e-u, to find an expedient, solve a difficulty, Nj. 177. Ld. 54, 180.
    5. to hire, take into service; ráða skipverja, Fms. vi. 238; réð Hallgerðr sér hjón, Nj. 25; ek em kona Njáls, segir hón, ok ræð ek eigi síðr hjón en hann, 54; Njáll réð honum hjón öll, 151; bóndi sagði húsfreyju sinni at hann hafði Hrapp ráðit með sér, 131; hón hafði ráðit mann til at svíkja konung í drykk, Fms. ix. 5; vilda ek at vit færim í hernað ok réðim menn til með okkr, Nj. 41; ráða land undan e-m, Fb. ii. 171.
    6. to plan, plot, contrive, or cause one’s death, put to death, betray, Germ. verra’ben; Regin þik réð, hann þik ráða mun, Fm. 22; þú rétt hann, Fas. i. 202; þær ætluðu at konungr mundi hafa rúðit hann, Fms. iv. 312; hann réð Plóg svarta föður-bana sinn, xi. 353; ef kona drepr bónda sinn eða ræðr hann fyrir íllsku sakir, Js. 27; ráða e-m bana, bana-ráð, Nj. 21, 52, Fb. i. 410, Skv. 1. 51:—ráða e-n af, to put out of the way, put to death, Gullþ. 14, Fms. i. 204, Al. 128; sá ótti er nú af ráðinn ok endaðr, Fs. 9; ek hygg at Þóroddr ætli nú af at ráða hingat-kvámur þínar, Eb. 144; ráða e-n frá, to despatch, Ld. 294; ráða e-n af dögum, to put to death; ráða e-n frá ríki, Fms. iii. 18; ráða e-n ofan, to overthrow, Bárð. 164.
    II. to rule, govern, with dat.; ráða Þrænda-lögum, Fms. i. 52; ráða landi, ráða ríki, 22, Nj. 41; Einarr jarl réð Orkneyjum, Fms. i. 197; Hákon konungr réð Noregi, x. 4; er réð fyrir Holtseta-landi, xi. 3; þann konung er ræðr Jórsala-landi … þann er Englandi ræðr, Edda 92; ráða landráðum, to have the government, govern, Fms. i. 52.
    2. to rule, prevail, have one’s own will, as also to manage, lead, have authority, management, and similar usages; skal ráða afl með þeim, Nj. 150; sá reð er ríkr var, Sól.; hann réð sér ekki fyrir kæti, he was beside himself for joy; skal hón sjálf ráða hvárt hón vill hann eða eigi, Nj. 24; ek skal hér ráða, 52; Ólafr bað móður sína eina ráða, Ld. 70; sögðu þá ráða eiga er fleiri vóru, 74; ætlar þú at þú munir ráða. Fms. vii. 13; konungr svarar ok biðr hann ráða, xi. 29: Lögmaðr skal ráða, he shall have the casting vote, Gþl. 18: the phrase, ef ek má ráða, if I can have it as I like; þú ræðr því, as you like! þvíat þar ræðr eigi frændsemi, Grág. i. 172: to rule, sól skal ráða um sumar en dagr um vetr, Gþl.; landfall ræðr (rules, makes the boundary) fyrir sunnan, Pm. 88; ór ánni ræðr keldan … ok lækr út úr henni til sjáfar, Dipl. ii. 1; ráða landa-merkjum, Eg. 711; ráða boði ok banni, Gþl. 76; ráða búi ok kaupum, 269; ráða giptingum, 211; ráða sessa kostum, Gm. 14; ráða kaupum, fé, skipti, Gþl.; ráða fé til þarfa, to dispose of money to advantage, put it out at interest, Gþl.; sigri vér ráðumk, Orkn. (in a verse); hugr ræðr hálfum sigri, a saving; ráða sínum ferðum, Fms. i. 75; réð Örn leiðsögu, Ld. 74: hvárt ek má nokkuru um þat ráða, Fms. vii. 13; mörgum ræðr litlu hve, ‘tis of small interest, Am. 33; ráða engu, Hdl. 49; ráða veðri. Rb. 388; veðr ræðr akri en vit syni, Hm.; hvar skal ek sitja—Móðir mín skal því ráða, Nj. 7; ek réð ráði hennar fyrr, i. e. gave her away, 23; hvárt hann kunni ráða fé sínu, Grág. i. 176; ráða orði, ii. 309; hvárt ræðr þú því er Steinarr son þinn sækir sökum Þorstein son minn, hast thou caused it, is it thy making? Eg. 727; þú því rétt er ek ríða skyldak, Fm. 26; ek því ræð, er þú ríða sér-at, Ls. 28; en réðu því Nornir, Orkn. (in a verse); ílla réð ek því, that was foolishly done, Fbr. (in a verse); ek hefi því ráðit, at …, Ísl. ii. 322; því þykki mér ráðit, well done, Sks. 100:—various phrases, ráða e-u bót (bætr) or ráða bót (bætr) á e-u, to mend, better, Hom. 159, Ld. 206, Fms. vii. 162, Landn. 8, Eb. 114:—with prep., ráða fyrir e-u (for-ráð), to rule, manage, govern, Fms. i. 288, Hkr. 1. 40; ráða fyrir lögum, Nj. 5, 150, Eg. 34, 239, 754, Ld. 76, 132, Fms. i. 11, Grág. i. 333:—ráða um e-t, to dispose of, (um-ráð); nú megu vit ekki ráða um hennar gjaforð, Fms. iv. 194:—ráða við e-ð, to be able to do, manage, Bárð. 163; eg ræð ekki við hann (þat), I cannot manage him; við-ráðanlegr, manageable:—ráða yfir e-u (yfir-ráð), to rule, govern, Fms. iv. 83.
    3. to have, possess, enjoy; hvítum ræðr þú enn hjöltunum, … ráða deigum brandinum, Eb. 238; ráða fé ok fjörvi, to enjoy wealth and life, Fm. 26; ráða arfi, gulli, hringum, Skv. 2. 9, Hkv. Hjörv. 6, 11; ráða nafni, aldri, hjarta, lofi, dýrð, to enjoy a name, life …, Lex. Poët.; ráða eign ok auðsölum. Fsm. 8, 9; ráða rauðum manni, to be red, Fbr. (in a verse):—part. ráðandi, with gen., ertu nokkurs ráðandi hér, hast thou any authority here? Nj. 54; þess verða ek ráðandi við mína menn, I will manage that. Fms. xi. 30; vera mikils ráðandi, of great influence, Fas. ii. 504: ráðandi postula, the ruler of the apostles, Edda 92, Lex. Poët.
    III. to explain, read; ráða gátu, to read a riddle, Fas. i. 454; varð engi sú gáta upp borin er hann réði (subj.) eigi, 532; ráða e-t, Am. 22; ráða draum, to read a dream, Nj. 121, Ld. 126, Ísl ii. 194, 197, x. 270, xi. 3, Rb. 394; Pharao dreymdi drauma ok urðu eigi ráðendr til, Ver. 17; veiztú hve rísta skal, veiztú hve ráða skal, of magical characters, Hm. 145:—ráða í e-t, to guess at, find out, Fms. xi. 16; ok væntir mik at eigi mundi í þat ráðit, Ísl. ii. 333; munu þeir ekki í ráða er myrkt er, 378, Fær. 255.
    2. to read, prop. to explain, interpret; skal hann láta ráða skrá heima at kirkju, K. Þ. K. 46; ráða rúnar, Am. 12, Hom. (St.); þegar Domitianus hafði rit ráðit, 623. 12, Karl. 16: ráða upp, to read up; þessi sömu bréf lét erkibiskup upp ráða í Danmörku, Fms. viii. 293; á alþingi léc Páll biskup ráða upp jarteinir ens sæla Þórláks, Bs. i. 352; tók ok lét þar upp ráða, 623. 10; ráða skrá, K. Þ. K.
    IV. to punish, chastise, with dat.; Guð ræðr oss till batnaðar sem sonum, Greg. 73; fóstri hans var harðr við hann ok réð honum mjök, Bs. i. 416; nú ef sveinn vill eigi nema ok leiðisk bók, þá skal hann færa til annarra verka, ok ráða honum til, svá at hvárki verði af örkuml né ílit, K. Þ. K. 56; honum var ráðit fyrir flestum höfuð-kirkjum, Sturl. ii. 147:—with acc., konu sína skal engi maðr með höggum ráða at öldri né at áti, N. G. L. i. 29; nú ef maðr ræðr konu sína eigna lyklum eða lásum ( beats her with keys or bars), þá er hann sekr, 356 (ráðning).
    V. with the notion of action, to undertake; ráða stórt, to aim high, aspire, Lex. Poët.; kann vera at ek finna þann höfðingja at minnr vaxi fyrir augum at ráða stórt ( to undertake great things), en þér konungr, Fms. vi. 399 (stór-ræði); ráða gott, to manage well, Ó. H. (in a verse).
    2. with prepp., ráða á e-t, to take to a thing; þeir réðu á íshöggit, Fms. vi. 336; ráða á e-n, to attack one; mun eigi þá á þik ráðit, Nj. 93, 253 (á-ræði):—ráða at e-m, to attack, invade, passim:—ráða af, to get off, clear; hann bað þá taka forka ok ráða at skipinu, and get the ship off, set her afloat, Ld. 56; aðilinn ræðr sik af baugbrotum, ef …, Grág. ii. 173; at hefir þú mik ráðit brekvísi, thou hast cured me of complaining, Ld. 134:—þá réðu þeir goðorð sitt undir Rafn fyrir sakir vinsælda hans, they put their ‘godord’ in the charge of R., Bs. i. 642:—ráða móti e-m, to go against in a fight, withstand; í móti Kára réð Mörðr Sigfússon, Nj. 253:—ráða til e-s, to rush in upon; hann reiddi upp öxina ok réð til Þorvarðar, Sturl. ii. 37, (til-ræði, an assault): to take to a thing, try, í vár réðu vér til ok hljópum í brott, Eg. 235; ok er þeim þótti sér færi til at ráða leyndusk þeir á brott, when they saw an opportunity they stole away, 572; ok er nú til at ráða ef þér vilit, now is the time for action, Nj. 154; Skarphéðinn kom fótum undir sik, ok réð þegar til í annat sinn, 202:—to start, make for, attempt, ráða til orrostu, to go to battle, Eg. 530; ráða til uppgöngu, 229; en þó ekki svá at til hans væri ráðanda (gerund.), Fms. vi. 352; réð hann þá til ok hjó sundr orminn, id.; þat var ekki annarra manna hlaup, enda réð ok engi til, Eg.; þeir ráða til ok hlaupa í munn drekanum, Fb. ii. 317; skal ráða til árinnar eðr eigi, shall we try to pass the river or not? Ld. 46; hann bauð út miklum her ok réð til skipa, Fms. i. 22; ráða til ferðar, to start on a journey, Landn.:—ráða skipi til hlunns, to put the ship in a shed, Eg. 515, Nj. 10; ráða sik frá e-u, to disengage oneself from, Hom. 147, MS. 655 xxvi. 1; ráða um, hann tók um strenginn, ok réð um at fara upp í skipit, and was just about to go up into the ship, Fms. ix. 24.
    3. periphrastically, with an infin. mostly without the particle ‘at;’ ráðumk ganga, we do go, Am. 77; ráðum yppa, spyrja segja, leyna, Lex. Poët.; hverr er segja ræðr, does tell, Hm. 125; hón réð vakna, she awoke, Am. 10; annan réð hón höggva, 48; ekki réttu leifa, 80; allt þats réð heita, 102; réð ek at ganga, Fas. ii. (in a verse); ef ek ræð á vág at vaða, Hbl. 47: with the particle ‘at,’ réð at stökkva, Eb. (in a verse): also reflex., réðsk at sofna, Rm. 5; but réð at sofna, went to sleep, 17: in prose, þau lög sem hann réði upp at segja, Íb. 12; ráðask geyja, Am. 24.
    B. Reflex. ráðask, referring to the person himself; ráðask um við e-n, to consult; Gunnarr görði görðina ok réðsk við öngan mann um, Nj. 80; hvárigum þótti ráð ráðit nema við aðra réðisk um, 167; ef hann hefði nokkut við mik um ráðisk, Ld. 306; þá réðsk hann um við vini sína, Eg. 9.
    2. to be resolved, fixed, settled; þá er kaupit réðsk, Nj. 17; eigi mun þat svá skjótt ráðask, Ísl. ii. 213; þetta mál er miklu meira en þat megi skjótt ráðask, Fms. vi. 18; af þeim tiðendum ræðsk þat, at …, ix. 433; eigi mun þetta ráðask þessu sinni, xi. 4; þá var ráðin sættin, Ld. 308; en ráðit kalla ek kaupit, Sd. 179; réðsk hann þá þar at hjóni, he hired himself out, entered service, Nj. 57. 3 (answering to and identical with A. V above), ráðask frá, to leave; þóat ek ráðumk frá, Fms. i. 225: ráðask í e-t, to undertake; ráðask í hernað, passim; hann réðsk í flokk með þeim, Nj. 94, Fb. ii. 172:—ráðask til e-s, to venture on a thing; þá ráðsk (imper.) þú til ok far í hauginn, Fms. iv. 28:—to move one’s abode, Hákon spurði Gunnar ef hann vildi ráðask til Hákonar jarls, Nj. 41; bið Una selja jörð sína ok ráðask hingat til mín, Orkn.; hann réðsk þangat bygðum, Þorf. Karl. 364; ráðask til ferðar (= Germ. sich begeben), Eg. 4; víkingar ok herkonungar er réðusk til liðs með Eiríki, Fms. i. 24; réðsk hann þá þangat um várit at fardögum ok móðir hans, Bs. i. 455: ráðask ór hernaði, to give up, leave off freebooting, Fg. 2:—at þeim hafði óheppilega um ráðisk, they had formed an unhappy plan, Knytl. S. ch. 69 (Lex. Poët.); cp. miðráðit.
    4. to turn out; ok réðsk til allgiptusamliga, Fms. x. 53; and in the mod. phrase, það réðsk vel, ended well; sjá hvernig það ræðst, see how it will turn out; of a dream, to prove true (see A. III), ok vilda ek at hvergi réðisk, Gísl. 24 (hvárngi réði, impers., 108, l. c.):—réðsk mikit mannfall, there came to be a great slaughter, Odd, 28.
    II. recipr., ráðask á, to attack one another; þeir spruttu upp með íllyrðum, ok svá kom at þeir ráðask á, Nj. 128.
    III. part. ráðinn, resolved, determined, Ölk. 36, Bárð. 173; hann mælti fátt eðr ekki við frá, … ef hann var ráðinn til at drepa þá, Fms. vii. 319:—likely, eigi er ráðit at oss fari svá, Nj. 89; þat er þó eigi ráðit hvárt svá berr til, Ld. 24; eigi er þat ráðit, at honum þætti allt sem hann talaði, Band. 12: compar., er engi ráðnari hlutr, more certain, Hom. (St.); at ráðnu, for certain, id.: valid, nýmæli ekki skal vera lengr ráðit en þrjú sumur, K. Þ. K. 56.
    2. clever; ríkr ok ráðinn, Grett. 90; vitr maðr ok ráðinn, Fb. ii. 357; roskinn ok ráðinn.
    3. betrayed, Germ. verrathen, Akv. 15, Fm. 37.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > RÁÐA

  • 106 RÚN

    f., pl. rúnar: [rún, raun, reyna are all kindred words, and a lost strong verb, rúna, raun, meaning to enquire, may be presumed; the original notion is scrutiny, mystery, secret conversation; Gotb. runa, by which Ulf. several times renders the Gr. μυστήριον and συμβούλιον (once, Matth. xxvii. 1), βουλή (twice, Luke vii. 30, 1 Cor. iv. 5); A. S. rún = a ‘rowning’ mystery, but also = writing, charter; Hel. rûna = colloquium, and geruni = loquela (Schmeller); cp. Old Engl. to rown, Germ. raunen; Gr. ἐ-ρευνάω is also supposed to be a kindred word (Bugge). In Scandin. writers and poets rún is chiefly used of magical characters, then of writing, whereas the derivative word raun means trial, enquiry, and rúni and rúna = a friend or counsellor.]
    B. A secret, hidden lore, mystery; frá jötna rúnum ok allra goða segðú it sannasta, Vþm. 42, 43; kenna rúnar, to teach wisdom, Rm. 33; dæma um rúnar ok regin-dóma, Hm. 112; minnask á fornar rúnar, Vsp. 59: saws, segja sannar rúnir, to tell true saws, Fas. ii. 302 (in a verse): a ‘rowning’ speech, vifs rúnir, a woman’s whispering, Bm.; heita e-n at rúnum, to consult one, Gh. 12, Skv. 3. 14, 43; hniga at rúnum, Gkv. 3. 4.
    II. a Rune or written character; the earliest Runes were not writing in proper sense, but fanciful signs possessing a magical power; such Runes have, through vulgar superstition, been handed down even to the present time, for a specimen of them see Ísl. Þjóðs. i.435, 436, and Arna-Magn. Nos. 687. 4 to, and 434. 12 mo (Ísl. Þjóðs.pref. ix); the classical passages for these spell-Runes are, Hm. 133 sqq., Sdm. 5 sqq., Skm. 29, 36, Eg. ch. 44, 61, 75, Yngl. S. ch. 7, Grett. ch. 85, N. G. L. iii. 286, 300, Vsp. 59; cp. also the phrase, rísta trénið, Grág., Fs. 56. The phrase in the old Danish Ballads, kaste runer, to throw Rúnes, i. e. chips (see hlaut, hlautviðr), may be compared to the Lat. sortes, Mommsen’s Hist, of Rome, vol. i. p. 187, foot-note (Engl. Ed.), or the Sibylline leaves in the Aeneid.
    2. Runes as writing;the word was first applied to the original Northern alphabet, which at an early time was derived from the common Phœnician, probably through Greek or Roman coins in the first centuries of our era. From these Runes were subsequently formed two alphabets, the old Scandinavian (whence again the Anglo-Saxon), as found on the Golden horn and the stone in Tune, and the later Scandinavian, in which the inscriptions in the greater number of the Swedish and Danish stone monuments are written, most being of the 10th (9th?) and following centuries.—A curious instance of the employment of Runes is their being written on a kefli (a round piece of wood) as messages (cp. the Gr. σκυτάλη), as is freq. recorded in the Sagas, e. g. Gísl. 45, 67, Fms. ix. 390, 490, Grett. 154 new Ed., Fb. i. 251 (of the deaf and dumb Oddny). It is doubtful whether poems were ever written in this way, for almost the only authority for such a statement is Eg. 605, where we read that the Sonatorrek was taken down on a Runic stick, the other instances being mostly from romances or fabulous Sagas, Grett. 144, Örvar Odds S.(fine). This writing on a kefli is mentioned in the Latin line, Barbara ‘fraxineis’ sculpatur runa ‘tabellis,’ Capella (5th century). In later times (from the 13th century) Runic writing was practised as a sort of curiosity; thus calendars used to be written on sticks, of which there is a specimen in the Bodl. Library in Oxford; they were also used for inscriptions on tombstones, spoons, chairs, and the like: there even exists in the Arna-Magn. Library a Runic MS. of an old Danish law, and there is a Runic letter in Sturl. (of the year 1241); Runes carved on an oar occur in Fs. 177: a hidden treasure in a chest is labelled with Runes, Fms. vi. 271, Sd. 146, cp. also the interesting record in Bs. i. 435 (sex manna bein vóru þar hjá honum ok vax ok rúnar þær er sögðu atburð lifláts þeirra).
    3. the word rún is also, though rarely, applied to the Latin alphabet; ef hann er á þingi þá skal hann rísta nafn hans ef hann kann rúnar, N. G. L. i. 171; or generally, ræki ek eigi hvárt þú rítr ø þitt eðr o,  eða a, ę eða e, y eða u, en ek svara svá, eigi er þat rúnanna kostr þó at þú lesir vel eða ráðir vel at líkindum, þar sem rúnar visa óskírt, heldr er þat þinn kostr, Thorodd 162; þessi er upphaf allra hátta svá sem málrúnar eru fyrir öðrum minum, Edda (Ht.) 121.
    III. in pr. names, Rún-ólfr: as the latter part in pr. names of women, Guð-rún, Sig-rún, Öl-rún, Landn., Nj., Bs., Sturl., Sæm.
    COMPDS: rúnakefli, rúnamál, Rúnameistari, rúnastafr.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > RÚN

  • 107 SÆR

    I)
    (gen. sævar), m. sea (øxn gengu upp ór sænum), (varð sjárinn ókyrr mjök; róa út á sjá), = sjár, sjór.
    (-sæ, -sætt), a. seen (auðsær, einsætt).
    * * *
    m., there are three forms, sær, sjór, sjár (cp. snær, slær, etc.); in old writers sær is commonest, sjór in mod., sjár is the most rare: the v (also written f) appears in gen. sævar, sjóvar, sjávar; dat. sævi, sjóvi, sjávi; acc. sæ, sjó, sjá; the dat. sing. was then shortened into sæ, sjó, sjá, which forms prevail in prose: in mod. usage the v has also been dropped between two vowels, sjóar for sjóvar, pl. sjóir for sjóvir, dat. sjóum: a gen. sjós is only used in special phrases, and is borrowed from the Danish: [Ulf. saiws and mari-saiws = λίμνη, Luke v. 12; A. S. sæ; Engl. sea; O. H. G. seô; Germ. see; Dan. ; Swed. sjö.]
    A. The sea, never used, like Germ. see, of a lake; himin, jörð ok sjá, Fms. i. 304; á sjá ok landi, 31; ef sjár kastar á land, Grág. ii. 388; þar sem sær mætisk ok græn torfa, N. G. L. i. 13; sær eða vötn, Grág. ii. 275; sær ok vindar, Eluc. 10; særinn féll á land, Fms. xi. 6 (and sjórinn, id.); upp ór sæ (dat.), 7; sænum, 6, 7 (four times); and sjónum, 6 (once); í sæinn, 6, 7 (thrice); sjóinn, id. (once); á sæinn út, Hkr. i. 229; út til sævar, ii. 106, Ó. H. 69; þar er vatni náir, eða sjá ( sea-water) ef eigi nær vatni, K. Þ. K. 5 new Ed.; sjár kolblár, Nj. 42; sjór kolblár, 19; á hverngi veg er sjór blendr saman fé manna, Grág. ii. 389; sá þeir skína ljós á sjóinn, Fms. i. 228; vestr með sjó, Landn. 36; sjór í miðjum hlíðum, 25, v. l.; Danavirki var gört … um þvert landit millum sjóva, Fms. xi. 28; sjór enn rauði, the Red Sea, 655 viii. 2; hann bað þrælinn færa sér í dælu-keri þat er hann kallaði sjó …, Ekki þykki mér þetta sjór, Landn. 251; bar sjóinn í seglit (the sea, waves), Fms. ix. 320; hón hjó fram öxinni á sjóinn …, varð af brestr mikill ok blóðugr allr sjórinn, Lv. 68, 69: the phrase, kasta á sæ, to cast into the sea, throw away, Ó. H. 38 (see glær); því kalla menn á sæ kastað er maðr lætr eigu sína, ok tekr ekki í mót, Ld. 128: storm mikinn ok stóran sjá, a high sea, Fms. vii. 51: sigla suðr um sjá (= sail through the Straits of Dover southward), Nj. 281.
    COMPDS:
    α. sævar-: sævar-bakki, a, m. the sea-beach, Sturl. ii. 31 C. sævar-borg, f. a castle on the sea-side, = sæborg, Fms. xi. 74. sævar-djúp, n. the depth of the sea, the deep sea, Mar. sævar-fall, n. tides, Rb. 6, 90. sævar-floti, a, m. a float, raft of timber, N. G. L. i. 423. sævar-gangr, m. the swell of the sea, the sea running high, Edda 41. sævar-hamrar, m. pl. sea-crags, Orkn. 310 (sjávar-hamrar, Fbr. 155). sævar-strönd, f. the sea-strand, 655 xii. 3. sævar-urð, f. piles of rocks on the sea-shore, Orkn. 114.
    β. sjávar-: sjávar-brekka, u, f. a shelving shore, Bs. i. 669. sjávar-djúp = sævar-djúp, Nj. 279. sjávar-gata, u, f. the way from the sea to a bouse; eigi er löng s. til Borgar, B. is not far from the coast, Band. 28 new Ed. sjávar-hamrar = sævarhamrar, Nj. 182, Fbr. 155. sjávar-háski, a, m. danger, distress at sea, Fms. x. 135. sjávar-hella, u, f. a flat rock projecting into the sea, Landn. 326 (Append.) sjávar-höll, f. a king’s hall on the sea-side, Fms. x. 20. sjávar-lopt, n. a house built aloft in the sea, Fms. vi. 162. sjávar-ríki, n. the kingdom of the sea, Bret. 6, Edda (pref.) sjávar-stjarna, u, f. the star of the sea, i. e. the Virgin Mary, ‘stella maris’, Mar. sjávar-stormr, m. a sea-storm, MS. 415. 9. sjávar-strönd, f. = sævarströnd, Edda i. 50.
    γ. sjóvar-, often spelt sjófar-, mod. sjóar-: sjóvar-afli, a, m. sea-fishery, produce from the sea, Grett. 88 A; svipull sjóar afli, a saying, Hallgr. sjóvar-bakki, a, m. = sævarbakki, Fms. vii. 145. sjóvar-bryggja, u, f. a landing bridge, Fms. vi. 5. sjóvar-djúp, n. = sævardjúp, Str. 288. sjóvar-fall (sjóar-fall) = sævarfall, Rb. 438, Jb. 338. sjóvar-floti = sævar-floti, K. Á. 178. sjóvar-gangr (sjóar-gangr) = sævargangr, Bær. 5, Fms. xi. 6, Edda (pref.) sjóvar-háski = sjávarháski, Fas. ii. 112, Bs. i. 326, Stj. 27. sjóvar-hringr, m. the circle of the ocean, girding the earth, Rb. 466. sjóvar-lögr, m. sea-water, Stj. 242. sjóvar-ólga, u, f. the swell of the sea, Fas. ii. 378. sjóvar-sandr, m. sea-sand, Stj. sjóvar-skafl, m. (see skafl), Fas. ii. 76. sjóvar-skrimsl, n. a sea-monster, Sks. 86. sjóvar-stormr, m. = sjávarstormr, Stj. 287, Al. 99. sjóvar-straumr, m. a sea-current, Fs. 142. sjóvar-strönd (sjóar-strönd), = sævar-strönd, N. G. L. i. 345, Fms. x. 233, Stj. 288. sjóvar-sýn, f. an outlook at sea; þvíat eins at allgóð sé s., in bright weather only, Landn. 25 (v. l.), Stj. 288. sjóvar-urð, f. = sævarurð. sjóvar-vatn, n. sea-water, Stj. 287.
    δ. sjóar-, passim in mod. usage.
    B. PROPER COMPDS:
    I. in pr. names, Sæ-björn, Sæ-mundr, Sæ-unn ( Sæ-uðr), Sæ-hildr; contr. in Sjólfr, qs. Sæ-úlfr, Landn.
    II. sæ-borg, f. a sea-side town, Clem. 24, Fms. xi. 75; a sea-castle, sæborgir Birkibeina, i. e. their ships, ix. 221. sæ-brattr, adj. ‘sea-brent,’ steep towards the sea, Ísl. ii. 73, Bret. 90. sæ-bygð, f. a coast-land, Fms. iv. 116. sæ-byggjar, m. pl. coast-dwellers, Fms. viii. 404. sæ-dauðr, adj. dead at sea, drowned, Sdm. sæ-farar, f. pl. sea-faring; á hann (Njörð) skal heita til sæfara ok veiða, Edda; kenna menn til víga eðr sæfara, id.: hann hét á Þor til sjófara ok harðræða, Landn. 206. sæ-fari, a, m. a sea-farer: as adjective = sæhafi, Landn. 129, v. l.: for the sæfa in Orkn. 406 (v. l.). Grett. 88 A, read sæfara (sæa). sæ-fiskr, m. a sea-fish, Karl. 476. sæ-færr, adj. sea-worthy, Fms. iv. 246, Landn. 107: of weather, fit for sea-faring, veðr hvasst ok eigi sæfært, Eg. 482; hvern dag er sjófært var, Gísl. 47. sæ-föng, n. pl. stores from the sea; úáran, biluðu mönnum sáð ok sæföng, Bs. i. 137. sæ-garpr, m. a great sea-champion, Fb. iii. 446, Bárð. 169. sæ-hafi or sæ-hafa, adj. sea-tossed, driven out of one’s course; in the phrase, verða s., hann var s. til Hvítramanna-lands, Landn. 129, Bs. i. 675, Orkn. 406, Grág. i. 93, 217, ii. 410; kemr á andviðri ok verða þeir sæhafa at dalnum, Fbr. 68 (new Ed. 36 l. c. line 15 has wrongly ‘sækja’), Grett. 17 new Ed. Sæ-hrimnir, m. the name of the mythical boar whose flesh the heroes in Walhalla feed on, Gm., Edda. sæ-karl, m. a sea-carle, raftsman, Skálda 163. sæ-konungr, m., q. v. sæ-kykvendi, m. a sea-beast, Ver. 2, Skálda 170, Rb. 104. sæ-kyrra, u, f. a sea-calm, smooth sea, Orkn. 164. sæ-lið, n. service at sea, Ld. 142. sæ-lægja, u, f. a mist on the sea; þoka ok sælægjur, Orkn. 358. sæ-lægr, adj. lying on the sea, an epithet of a sea-mist; s. mjörkvi, Fms. vi. 261, viii. 178 (spelt sjálægr). sæ-naut, n. a sea-cow (fabulous); þjórr, ok var sænauta litr á hornunum, Vápn. 21, see Ísl. Þjóðs. i. 134. 135. sæ-nár, m., Grág. ii. 131, see nár. sæ-sjúkr, adj. sea-sick, Fb. iii. 427. sæ-tré, n. pl., poët. sea-trees, i. e. ships; hér eru vit Sigurðr á sætrjám, Skv. 2. 17; hann lá úti á sætrjám vetr ok varmt sumar, Fas. ii. 242. ☞ For the compds in sjá- and sjó- see pp. 534, 535.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > SÆR

  • 108 VIÐ

    I)
    prep. with dat. and acc.
    I. with dat.
    hann sló honum niðr v. steininum, he dashed his head against the stone;
    hús liggja v. velli, the houses lie in ruins;
    kasta sér niðr v. velli, to cast oneself down on the ground;
    er inn efri kjöptr v. himni, en inn neðri við jörðu, the upper jaw touches the heaven, the lower the earth;
    hann hjó hann upp v. garðinum, he smote him close by the fence;
    skera af sér strenginn við øxinni, to cut the string, asunder against the axe;
    2) against, towards, of direction;
    horfa v. e-m, to look towards, face;
    3) along with (hann hafði marga smiðu v. sér);
    4) with, of an instrument (jarl hljóp upp v. sverði);
    5) among;
    gengu síðan í sæti sin v. öðrum mönnum, among other men;
    6) denoting barter, exchange, against, for (geta gull v. grjóti);
    7) denoting remedy, against (hjálpa e-m v. e-u);
    8) against, denoting contest, warding off (hafa liðsafla v. e-m);
    hafa (viz. afl) v. e-m, to be one’s match;
    9) ellipt. usages;
    stinga v. fótum, to stop;
    hrífa v., to catch hold;
    risa v., to withstand;
    hvatz hann fiðr v., whatsoever he may object;
    II. with acc.
    1) by, at, close to (sníða skeggit við hökuna);
    skjöldr við skjöld, shield to shield;
    v. Sandhólaferju, at Sandholferry;
    v. veginn, by the wayside;
    v. ána, by the river;
    draga segl v. hún, to hoist the sail to the top;
    festa e-n v. meið, tré, to fasten to a pole, tree;
    binda v. fót e-s, to bind up a broken leg;
    dró upp flóka v. austr, in the east;
    2) of time, towards, at;
    v. solar-setr, at sunset;
    v. sól, with the sun, at sunrise;
    v. aptan, towards evening;
    3) at, by (vera heima v. bú sitt);
    Hrútr var v. skip um sumarit, H. stayed by his ship during the summer;
    sitja v. stýri, to sit at the rudder;
    styðja sik v. e-t, to lean on;
    ganga v. staf, to walk with a staff;
    vera v. e-t, to be present at;
    sitja v. drykk, to sit at drink;
    í sýn v. bœinn, within sight of the town;
    5) denoting company, with (bauð þeim heim vill alla sína menn);
    v. annan, þriðja, fjórða mann, being two, three, four altogether;
    6) towards (a person or thing), respecting, regarding (mildr, blíðr, góðr v. e-n);
    til gæzlu v. e-n: for keeping, watching one;
    hræddr v. e-n, afraid of one;
    7) of cause, by, at;
    falla v. högg, to fall by a stroke;
    sigla v. stjörnuljós, to sail by starlight;
    verða reiðr v. e-t, to become wroth at;
    8) as compared with, set off against (þrjóta mun okkr illsku v. þik);
    eigi minna virðr en v. konunginn, of equal worth with the king;
    9) according to, after (gera klæði v. vöxt e-s);
    v. sik, in proportion;
    hann var skapaðr allr v. sik, well shaped, symmetrical;
    vita, hvat v. sik væri, to know what was the matter;
    10) denoting means, with, by (v. þessar fortölur);
    tendra eld v. e-t, to make fire by;
    11) ellipt. usages;
    bregða við, to start;
    hann þagði v., he remained silent;
    fá v. þrjú skip, to add three ships;
    þurfa v., to need;
    bjarga, hjálpa e-u v., to help, put right;
    koma e-u við, to bring about.
    (gen. -jar, pl. -jar), f. withy, withe; collar (viðjar af gulli).
    pers. pron. dual, we two.
    * * *
    1.
    f., gen. sing. viðjar, pl. viðjar, [Dan. vidje; Engl. withy; akin is víðir, q. v.]:— a withy or with; síðan var viðin ( a withy halter) dregin á hals honum, Fms. vii. 13 (see v. l.); þarmarnir urðu at viðu (sic) sterkri, Fas. iii. 34; ef röng eða viðjar slitna, Jb. 398; var enginn saumr í, en viðjar fyrir kné, of a boat, Fms. vii. 216; höggva tré til viðja, K. Þ. K. 88; viðjar af gulli ok silfri, on a dog, Hkr. i. 136, Fas. iii. 45; tún-svín þat er hringr, knappr eða við sé í rana, Grág. ii. 232; stjórn-við, the ‘rudder-withy,’ the strap in which the paddle-like rudder moved, like the ζευκτηρίαι in Act. Apost. xxvii. 40.
    2.
    pron. pers. dual (= vit), we two (see ek C); this spelling, which is also that of the oldest vellums, answers to the mod. pronunciation, passim: in mod. usage it has quite taken the place of the old plur. vér.
    3.
    prep., also used ellipt. without its case, or simply as an adverb; við is a curtailed form of viðr, which latter form remains in a few compds, even in mod. usage, thus, viðr-eign, viðr-kenna, viðr-nefni, viðr-lífi, viðr-væri; when found singly, við is the common form in Icel.; but as in MSS. it is commonly abbreviated, v̾, the two forms are hardly distinguishable; við, however, is received as the usual form, viðr being more freq. in Norse vellums, and in some later Icel. vellums imitating the Norse spelling: [Goth. wiþra = πρός; A. S. wider; cp. Scot. wither-shins; O. H. G. widar; Germ. wieder; but Engl. with; Dan. ved; Swed. wäd]:—against, towards, etc.
    WITH DAT.
    A. Against, denoting a leaning or resting on, striking against, or the like; hann hjó hann upp við garðinum, smote him standing against the wall, Nj. 120; stinga höndum við berginu, Symb. 59; ganga við brekkunni, up-hill, against the hill, cp. Lat. adversus montem, Valla L. 212; skjóta við honum skildinum, Fms. i. 44; ljósta skildi við kesjunni, Eg. 378; hann spyrndi við svá fast … spyrna við grunni, Edda 36; kasta sér niðr við vellinum, Nj. 58; leggja e-n við velli, Boll. 344; slá honum niðr við steininum, dashed his head against the stone, Finnb. 292; hann drap hann við borðinu, Korm. 236; hjó af honum höfuð við stokkinum, Fas. ii. 285; ok lagði (þá) við stokki, Am. 73; hús liggja við velli, lie down in ruins, Fms. iii. 144; er hinn efri kjöptr við himni enn hinn neðri við jörðu, the upper jaw touching the heaven, the lower the earth, Edda 41; skera af sér strenginn við öxinni, rubbing it against the axe, Nj. 136; vóru segl hans at sjá við hafi, the sails were seen out at sea, far in the offing, Fas. ii. 403.
    II. against, towards, of direction; gapa við tunglinu, Fas. iii. 622; horfa við e-m, to look towards, face, Eg. 293; horfa baki við e-m, Hkr. iii. 384; líta við e-m, Nj. 132, Fms. i. 125, vii. 314; horfa vid landi, A.A. 24; snúa baki við e-m, Fas. i. 296; snúask við e-m, Hkr. ii. 120.
    III. along with, with, denoting company; hann hafði við sér harpara einn, Str. 57; hann hafði marga smiðu við sér, Fms. ix. 377; fór Margaðr ok Guthormr við honum, Hkr. iii. 113; at Ástríðr mundi vera við feðr sínum, i. 188; er hér ok Sigurðr við jarli, Fms. ix. 327; hann var þar upp fæddr við henni, x. 421; bjóðum vér þér við Hákoni þangat, ix. 252; ferr heim við sínum mönnum, Rd. 312; fór hann við liði sínu, Hkr. iii. 44; við hundrað skipum, Fas. i. 461; gengr síðan í sæti sín við oðrum mönnum, Fms. x. 17; bað biskup ríða við sér (= með sér), 6.
    2. with, of an instrument; jarl hljóp upp við sverði, Fms. ix. 340; sjau menn við vápnum, viii. 14; gengu tveir menn við merkjum, x. 15: the phrase, eiga, ala, geta barn við kouu, Grág., Fms. i. 113, iii. 110, Ld. 102, Eg. 31; merrin fékk við þeim hesti, Landn. 195.
    3. spec. usages; við góðum vinskap, Boll. 362; halda vináttu við föstum trúnaði, Fms. ix. 375; at þær sagnir muni vera við sannindum, true, viii. 6; at berjask við honum eðr við honum lífit láta, ix. 332; fara við herskildi … eyða land við eldi, x. 134; ausa e-t við moldu, Hkr. i. 220; skipuðu mörgum hlutum við (with, among) sínum mönnum, Fms. x. 91; gengu síðan í sæti sín við öðrum mönnum, among other men, 17; skreiðask fram við (= með) landinu, viii. 437.
    4. = ok, with, together with; Þórr við Grimni = Th. and G., Hallfred; höfuð við hjarta, head and heart, Kormak.
    B. METAPH. USAGES:
    I. denoting barter, exchange, against, for (like Gr. ἀντί); gefa gull við grjóti, Fas. iii. 45; selja við verði, Fms. i. 80; seldu mik við hleifi, Hm.; við litlu verði, Eg. 100; við fémútu, Nj. 215; meta e-t við silfri, Fms. x. 5; gefa margra manna líf við yðvarri þrályndi, iv. 194.
    2. denoting remedy, against; beiti við bit-sóttum en við bölvi rúnar, Hm. 140; hjálpa e-m við e-u, to help against, passim.
    II. against, denoting contest, warding off, withstanding; hafa afla við e-m, Lv. 43; hafa liðs-afla, liðs-kost við e-m, Ld. 372, Hkr. i. 272: ellipt., hafa (viz. afi) við e-m, to be one’s match, Lv. 109; þótti sem engi mundi hafa við þeim í vígi, Nj. 89; eg hefi ekki við þér, I cannot lift with (i. e. am no match for) thee; ábyrgjask e-t við e-u, Grág. ii. 216, 364; forða e-m við háska, Edda i. 116; halda þá við ágangi Hákonar, Fms. i. 224; varðveita e-n við e-u, Grág.; ekki hélzk við þeim, Eg. 125; rísa við e-m, Sturl. ii. 119; vera búinn, van-búinn við e-m, Ld. 324; sat hann þar við áhlaupum Dana, Fms. i. 28; vinna við sköpum, Fas. i. 199; sporna við e-u, göra við e-u, see göra, sporna; ef þat nemr við förinni, Ld. 70 (see nema A.I. 7, 8); mæla við e-u, Hkr. ii. 198; tölðu allir við förinni, Greg. 28; setja hug sinn við e-u, Fms. x. 232; kveða nei við e-u, Sturl. i. 27; drepa hendi við e-u, Hkr. ii. 164; reiðask við e-u, Nj. 182; e-m ríss hugr við e-u, Fas. i. 30; mér býðr við e-u, to loathe; sjá við e-u, to shun; varna við e-u, to beware of; vera hætt við e-u, in danger of, Ísl. ii. 262; ú-hætt við e-u, safe, Landn. 319.
    III. with verbs;liggja við e-u, to lie on the verge of; honum lá við falli, Fas. iii. 261; búið við skipbroti, Ísl. ii. 245; honum var við andhlaupi, Eg. 553; sjá, horfa, líta … við e-u, to look towards; taka við e-u, to receive; búask við e-u, to prepare for, expect, Ld. 106; verða vel, ílla, við e-u, to behave well, ill, on some occasion; komask við veðri, see veðr.
    IV. ellipt. usages; þeir snerusk þá við, turned round, facing, Nj. 245; hón drap við hendi, Lv. 38; hann laust við atgeirinum, Nj. 84.; hann stakk við forkinum, Eg. 220; hann stakk við fótum, stopped, Finnb. 300; hrífa við, to catch hold, Bs. i. 197, 423, Gísl. 125; búask við, to make oneself ready; göra við, to resist; rísa við, to withstand, Fs.; at ek bjóða við tvenn verð, Ld. 146; hvatz hinn fiðr við, whatsoever he may object, Nj. 99; taka við, to begin where another stops; þú skalt gefa mér við ( in return) verjuna, Fbr.
    WITH ACC.
    A. By, at, close to:
    I. denoting proximity; skjöldr við skjöld, shield to shield, in a row, Nj. 125; skip við skip, Ó. H. (in a verse); samnask hlutr við hlut, Rb. 108; hálsinn við herðarnar, Ld. 40; sníða skeggið við hökuna, Eg. 564; við bryggju-sporðinn, Fms. i. 14; grafa barn við kirkju-garð út, K. Þ. K.; uppi við fjallit, Eg. 137; við Sandhóla-ferju, Nj. 29; við vaðit, 83; við veginn, by the way-side, Fb. ii. 330; hér við ána, by the river, Ld. 46; búa við Þjórsá, Nj. 93; liggja við land, Fms. i. 14; við Ísland, Grág.; binda stein við hálsinn, Ld. 154; draga segl við hún, hoist sail to the top, Hkr. ii. 6; reka spora við eyra e-m, Nj. 82; festa e-n við meið, tré, to fasten to a pole, a tree, Glúm. 391; nísta við gólfit, to pin it to the floor (see nista); binda við fót e-s, to bind up a broken leg, Bárð. 167; dró upp flóka við austr, in the east, Vígl. 22.
    2. temporal, towards, at; við vetr sjálfan, Fms. ii. 97; Krók. 51 C; við sólar-setr, Fas. i. 514; við sól, with the sun, at sunrise. Eg. 717; við aptan, towards evening, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 143; við þat sjálft, at that moment, Fms. xi. 432; bregða í kross við hvert orð, at every word, K. Þ. K.; vera við aldr, to be stricken in years, Eb. 18, Ísl. ii. 192, Fms. ii. 81; ef barn er við dauða, on the point to die, N. G. L. i. 345; við sjálft, on the verge of (see sjálfr); við váða sjálfan, búið við geig, on the verge of, Eg. 158; Grettir var við svefn, just asleep, Grett. 127.
    3. phrases, við svá búit, after all done, often with the notion of ‘in vain, nothing having been done’ (búa B. II. δ); fóru við þat heim, Fms. i. 54, ix. 469, Nj. 127; skildu við þetta, 260, Ísl. ii. 217.
    II. at, to; Hrútr er við skip, Nj. 4; Hrútr var við búð, 79; vera heima við bú sitt, 215; hanga upp við siglu-rá, Fas. iii. 659; bundinn við staf, Eg. 232; fastr við altara, fastened to the altar, Vm. 110; styðja sik vid e-t, to lean on, Fms. ix. 512; sitja upp við hægindit, leaning on it, Ld. 16; sitja upp við vegginn, Nj. 153; ganga við staf, 219; ganga við tréfót, Eb. 66; styðjask við höndina, Fas. i. 228; rísa upp við olboga, Þórð. 15; sitja við stýri, at the rudder, Eg. 385; hafa barn við brjóst, to have a bairn at breast, N. G. L. i. 340; leggja, bæta, auka, við e-t, to add to; blanda við e-t, to mix with; vera við e-t, to be present at, Ld. 92, Eg. 540; sitja við drykk, mat, to sit at drink, meat, Eg. 303, 420.
    III. denoting association, together with; vera samþingi, samfjórðungs við e-n, Grág. ii. 237; vera saman við e-n, vera samvista við e-n, eiga samneyti við, vera sammæðr við e-n, passim; vera utan-fjórðungs við víg, Grág. ii. 89; vera við e-t riðinn; þeir vildu eigi vera hér við heiðna menn, Íb. 4; búa við e-n, Gísl. 17.
    2. direction; í sýn við bæinn, Fas. ii. 507; í örskots-helgi við garðinn, Grág.; standa í höggfæri við e-n, Nj. 97; við þat lík at lifa, Hm.
    IV. denoting company, with; bauð þeim heim við alla sína menn, Vígl. 27; riðu við sextigi manna, Nj. 10, 213, Ld. 164; gékk á land við einn svein, Fms. ix. 502; sækja land við útlendan her, Hkr. i. 198; við fá, marga … menn, Fas. i. 35; the phrase, við annan, þriðja fjórða … mann (see annarr I. 1); þú ert hér kominn við svá mikit fé, Ld. 112; sækja mál við níu búa, Grág.; við váttorð, Kb. i. 103; leyfa e-t við vitni, Ld. 104; bjóða e-t við váttorð, in the presence of, by witnesses, Nj. 243.
    B. METAPH. USAGES:
    I. towards a person or thing, respecting, regarding; hryðja við aðilja, Grág. (Kb.) i. 127; missa fjár síns við þjóf, Grág.; skilja við e-n, to part with (see skilja); til metnaðar við sik, Edda i. 20; til huggunar við sik, Ld. 228; til þjónustu við e-n, Eg. 28; til gæzlu við e-n, for keeping, watching one, Ld. 152; ganga, koma, fara til fundar, til móts … við e-n, 62, 90, Nj. 4, Eg. 101; mildr, blíðr, léttr, kátr, ástúðigr, góðr, harðr, grimmr, reiðr, harðráðr, stríðr, … við menn, mild … towards, Nj. 2, 47, 48; víkjast undan við e-n, Ld. 42; fyrir kapps sakir við e-n, til liðveizlu, hjálpar … við e-n, Eg. 44, Nj. 75; sýna vinskap, halda vinskap við e-n, Ld. 150; leggja ást við e-n, 34; líka vel, ílla við e-n, Nj. 53; eiga eyrindi við e-n, Eg. 260; eiga orð við e-n, 255; hafa lög við e-n, Nj. 106; tala, mæla, ræða, segja, spjalla við e-n, to talk, speakwith a person, passim; skipta, eiga, … við e-n, to deal… with; berjask, deila við e-n, to fight with, against; göra e-t við e-n, so to act with, Greg. 43; reyna e-t við e-n, to contend with one, Nj. 46, 94, Edda i. 106; hafa misgört við e-n, Fms. viii. 103; láta vaxa óþokka við e-n, Nj. 107; tilför við Gunuar, 101; mála-tilbúnaðr við e-n, 100; sekr við e-n, útlagr við goða, Grág.
    2. hræddr við e-n, afraid of one; verða varr við e-t, to perceive; vanr við e-t, used to a thing; hann var svá vanr við vini sína, Fms. viii. 220; fella sik við e-t, kunna við e-t, to apply oneself to, to like.
    II. of cause, by, at; falla við högg, to fall by a stroke, Nj. 163; hrata við lagit, Eg. 379; vakna við e-t, Fas. ii. 116; vakna við draum; verða glaðr, reiðr, hryggr, úkátr … við e-t, to become glad, wroth … at, Íb. 10, Eg. 102, 321, passim; bregða sér við e-t, Ld. 190: by, við minn atbeina, Fms. vi. 66; við samþykki e-s, Eg. 165; við ráð e-s, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 30; gört þat við einræði þitt, Ld. 188; et þat at vánum við skaplyndi Þorgeirs, Nj. 255; hlaða seglum við mikinn háska, with great danger, Korm. 168; sigla við stjörnu-ljós, to sail by star-light, Fms. i. 24; lesa við ljós, to read with a light; búa sik við skart, to dress fine.
    III. as compared with, set off against; sex sær við kú, Grág. i. 502–504; selja, virðing sína við íllgirni þínaa, Eb. 160; þrjóta mun mik íllsku við þik. Hkr. i. 322; mik skortir við hann, Nj. 90; hafa afta við e-n, Eg. 187; eigi minna virðr enn við konunginn, i. e. of equal worth with the king, Fms. xi. 45; er þetta við mikla fémuni, Hrafn. 19; fjórðungi skerð við goðorð önnur, Grág. (Kb.) i. 211; Skotland er þriðjungr ríkis við England, Nj. 266; þriðjung við liðsmenn, Eg. 57; at þriðjungi við ykkr, Ld. 102; helming við hann, Fms. i. 22; gaf þeim hálfar tekjur við sik, 7.
    IV. við þann kost, on that condition, Grág. (Kb.) i. 233: of medicine, for, við svefnleysi, við orms-bit, við offeitan kvið …, Lækn.: in mod. usage dat., and so in Hm. 138.
    V. denoting fitness, proportion; göra klæði við vöxt e-s, Eg. 516; við þeirra hæfi, 109; er þat ekki við þitt æði, Ld. 298; vera við alþýðu-skap, Fs. 63; við sik, in proportion, B. K. 8; neyta skógar við sik sem þarf, Grág. ii. 292; þat er hann má eigi sjálfr við sik njóta, himself alone, 623. 21; hann var skapaðr allr við sik, well shaped, symmetrical, Fas. i. 173; fagrt ok allt vel við sik, Fms. x. 321; veðrit vesnaði en nátt-myrkr á við sik. Bjarn. 52; vita hvat við sik væri, to know what was the matter, Fms. xi. 11, Fas. ii. 516; leggja mál við tré, Ld. 316; draga kvarða við lérept, vaðmál, Grág. i. 497, 498.
    VI. with, by, denoting means; tendra eld við fjallrapa, to light fire with, Bs. i. 7; við þessar fortölur, Ld. 204; kom svá við umtölur góðra manna, Nj. 267; við áskoran þína, 258; mýkjask við e-t, Fms. v. 239; húð skorpnuð við eld, Nj. 208.
    VII. with verbs; lifa við skömm, meizlur, harm, lifa við slíka harma, to live with or in shame, sorrow, Nj. 92, Hkr. ii. 107, Eg. 604, Ld. 332; leika við e-n, Nj. 2; kaupa við e-n, Grág.; binda við e-t, to bind, fasten to; sætta, rægja, friða e-n við e-n, Eg. 226, Grág. ii. 99; tala, … við e-n, to speak, deal … with, Nj. 2, 197, Ld. 22 (see I); hefja upp bónorð við e-n, Eg. 38; leita eptir við e-n, leita ráða við e-n, eiga hlut at við e-n, Nj. 75, 101, 213, Eg. 174; fæða, lifa, fæðask, ala, búa, bjargast, við e-t, to feed, live, subsist … on, Edda i. 46, Fms. i. 226, v. 219, Nj. 236, passim; vera við e-t, to be present at, and metaph. to enjoy, Hom. 87, Edda (pref.); nema lyfsteinn sé við riðinn, Ld. 250; hann brá upp við fætinum (viz. við lagit), Nj. 264; binda við e-t, to bind to, Fms. ix. 358; at þeim heimilum ok í örskotshelgi við (viz. þau) á alla vega, Grág. (Kb.) i. 88; þar við, hér við, at engi mundi þar þora við at etja, Nj. 89.
    2. hagr við e-t, skilful at; kunna vel við e-t, id.; skjarr við skot, Ls.; temja, venja, … við e-t; drekka við sleitur (see sleita); kveða við raust, Sturl. iii. 317, Eg. 554; syngja vid tón, Sturl. iii. 210; búa sik við skart, skikkja búin við gull, Fms. x. 199; skyrta saumuð við gull, embroidered with, Fas. ii. 529; glóa við gull, to glow or gleam with gold, Lex. Poët.
    VIII. elliptical or ad- verbial usages; bregða við, to start; hann þagði við, remained silent, Nj. 2; verða bilt, felmt við, Ísl. ii. 274, Nj. 105; fá við þrjú skip, to add three ships, Fms. xi. 73; jók nú miklu við, it waxed much, Ld. 54; kveða við, gella við, to scream, yell; þurfa við, to need, Nj. 74; njóta e-s við, to enjoy, 85; komask við, to be touched; leita við, to try; bera við, to happen (see bera); koma við, to touch; standa, bíða við, to stop a bit; nema við, to hinder, cause a hindrance; kunna við, to like; koma e-u við, to bring a thing about, 101; ef ek viðr um kæmumk, if I could manage it, Hbl.; bjarga e-u við, hjálpa við, to help, put right; reisa við, rétta við, to raise up again, put right; kannask við, to recognise; vera við staddr, to be present, = við e-t staddr.
    IX. in recipr. phrases, talask við, eigask við, fásk við, etc., to speakto one another, where the object is suffixed to the preceding verb.
    X. with an adverb or particle, of direction; upp á við, niðr á við, upwards, downwards; vestr á við, Fas. ii. 244; móts við, towards; á við, equivalent to (það er á við tvær merkr); austan við, vestan við, sunnan við, fram við, inn við, etc., followed by an accusative.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > VIÐ

  • 109 āiō

        āiō v. defect.    [for * ag-io, AG-]; in use, praes. ind. āiō, aïs, aït, āiunt; subj. āias, āiat; imperf. āiēbam throughout, colloq., aibam (disyl.); part. āiēns (C. twice), to say yes, assent, affirm: negat quis? nego: ait? aio, if one says no, I say no; if yes, I say yes, T.: Diogenes ait, Antipater negat: ut quibus creditam non sit negantibus, isdem credatur aientibus: ne faciam Omnino versūs? aio, I say so, H.—In gen., to assert, affirm, aver, say, tell, relate: crimen ais te metuisse: Tarquinium a Cicerone inmissum aiebant, S.: nescio quid velle loqui te aiebas mecum, you were saying, H.: quem secum aiunt portare Penatīs, they say, V.: a me deceptos ait Hirtium et Caesarem (sc. esse).—With attraction: vir bonus ait esse paratus, H.: ‘hunccine,’ aiebat, ‘quem,’ etc., L.: ‘loris non uteris,’ aio, H.: ‘O te felicem,’ aiebam tacitus, said to myself, H.: secum ait, O.: Talia dicenti, ‘tibi’ ait ‘revocamina’ corvus ‘Sint precor,’ O.: Causa optumast, nisi quid pater ait aliud, T.: Haec ait, V.: Sic ait, et dicto citius tumida aequora placat, V.: vita vitalis, ut ait Ennius, to adopt the phrase of: uti mos vester ais, H.: ut ait in Synephebis, as (the author) says.—Aiunt, ut aiunt, quem ad modum or quod aiunt, in quoting a current phrase, as they say, as is said, as the saying is: ut quimus, aiunt, quando, ut volumus, non licet, T.: se Massiliam, ut aiunt, non in haec castra conferet: Iste claudus, quem ad modum aiunt, pilam: conspexit, ut aiunt, Adrasum quendam vacuā tonsoris in umbrā, H.: ain tu? (for aisne) ain tute? ain tandem? ain vero? a colloq. phrase, expressing surprise, do you really mean? indeed? really? is it possible? often only an emphatic what? Ain tu tibi hoc incommodum evenisse iter? T.: ain tandem? inquit, num castra vallata non habetis? L.: Hem, quid ais, scelus? what do you mean? T.: Quid tu ais, Gnatho? num quid habes quod contemnas? what say you? T.

    Latin-English dictionary > āiō

  • 110 animus

    ănĭmus, i, m. [a Graeco-Italic form of anemos = wind (as ego, lego, of ego, lego); cf. Sanscr. an = to breathe, anas = breath, anilas = wind; Goth. uz-ana = exspiro; Erse, anal = breath; Germ. Unst = a storm (so, sometimes); but Curt. does not extend the connection to AФ, aêmi = to blow; a modification of animus—by making which the Romans took a step in advance of the Greeks, who used hê psuchê for both these ideas—is anima, which has the physical meaning of anemos, so that Cic. was theoretically right, but historically wrong, when he said, ipse animus ab anima dictus est, Tusc. 1, 9, 19; after the same analogy we have from psuchô = to breathe, blow, psuchê = breath, life, soul; from pneô = to breathe, pneuma = air, breath, life, in class. Greek, and = spirit, a spiritual being, in Hellenistic Greek; from spiro = to breathe, blow, spiritus = breath, breeze, energy, high spirit, and poet. and post-Aug. = soul, mind; the Engl. ghost = Germ. Geist may be comp. with Germ. giessen and cheô, to pour, and for this interchange of the ideas of gases and liquids, cf. Sol. 22: insula adspiratur freto Gallico, is flowed upon, washed, by the Gallic Strait; the Sanscr. atman = breath, soul, with which comp. aytmê = breath; Germ. Odem = breath, and Athem = breath, soul, with which group Curt. connects auô, aêmi; the Heb. = breath, life, soul; and = breath, wind, life, spirit, soul or mind].
    I.
    In a general sense, the rational soul in man (in opp. to the body, corpus, and to the physical life, anima), hê psuchê:

    humanus animus decerptus ex mente divina,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 13, 38:

    Corpus animum praegravat, Atque affixit humo divinae particulam aurae,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 77:

    credo deos immortales sparsisse animos in corpora humana, ut essent qui terras tuerentur etc.,

    Cic. Sen. 21, 77:

    eas res tueor animi non corporis viribus,

    id. ib. 11, 38; so id. Off. 1, 23, 79:

    quae (res) vel infirmis corporibus animo tamen administratur,

    id. Sen. 6, 15; id. Off. 1, 29, 102:

    omnes animi cruciatus et corporis,

    id. Cat. 4, 5, 10:

    levantes Corpus et animum,

    Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 141:

    formam et figuram animi magis quam corporis complecti,

    Tac. Agr. 46; id. H. 1, 22:

    animi validus et corpore ingens,

    id. A. 15, 53:

    Aristides primus animum pinxit et sensus hominis expressit, quae vocantur Graece ethe, item perturbationes,

    first painted the soul, put a soul into his figures, Plin. 35, 10, 36, § 98 (cf.:

    animosa signa,

    life-like statues, Prop. 4, 8, 9): si nihil esset in eo (animo), nisi id, ut per eum viveremus, i. e. were it mere anima, Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 56:

    Singularis est quaedam natura atque vis animi, sejuncta ab his usitatis notisque naturis, i. e. the four material elements,

    id. ib. 1, 27, 66: Neque nos corpora sumus. Cum igitur nosce te dicit, hoc dicit, nosce animum tuum, id. ib. 1, 22, 52:

    In quo igitur loco est (animus)? Credo equidem in capite,

    id. ib. 1, 29, 70:

    corpora nostra, terreno principiorum genere confecta, ardore animi concalescunt,

    derive their heat from the fiery nature of the soul, id. ib. 1, 18, 42:

    Non valet tantum animus, ut se ipsum ipse videat: at, ut oculus, sic animus, se non videns alia cernit,

    id. ib. 1, 27, 67: foramina illa ( the senses), quae patent ad animum a corpore, callidissimo artificio natura fabricata est, id. ib. 1, 20, 47: dum peregre est animus sine corpore velox, independently of the body, i. e. the mind roaming in thought, Hor. Ep. 1, 12, 13:

    discessus animi a corpore,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 18; 1, 30, 72:

    cum nihil erit praeter animum,

    when there shall be nothing but the soul, when the soul shall be disembodied, id. ib. 1, 20, 47; so,

    animus vacans corpore,

    id. ib. 1, 22, 50; and:

    animus sine corpore,

    id. ib. 1, 22, 51:

    sine mente animoque nequit residere per artus pars ulla animai,

    Lucr. 3, 398 (for the pleonasm here, v. infra, II. A. 1.):

    Reliquorum sententiae spem adferunt posse animos, cum e corporibus excesserint in caelum pervenire,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 11, 24:

    permanere animos arbitramur consensu nationum omnium,

    id. ib. 1, 16, 36:

    Pherecydes primus dixit animos esse hominum sempiternos,

    id. ib. 1, 16, 38:

    Quod ni ita se haberet, ut animi immortales essent, haud etc.,

    id. Sen. 23, 82: immortalitas animorum, id. ib. 21, 78; id. Tusc. 1, 11, 24; 1, 14, 30:

    aeternitas animorum,

    id. ib. 1, 17, 39; 1, 22, 50 (for the plur. animorum, in this phrase, cf. Cic. Sen. 23, 84); for the atheistic notions about the soul, v. Lucr. bk. iii.—
    II.
    In a more restricted sense, the mind as thinking, feeling, willing, the intellect, the sensibility, and the will, acc. to the almost universally received division of the mental powers since the time of Kant (Diog. Laert. 8, 30, says that Pythagoras divided hê psuchê into ho nous, hai phrenes, and ho thumos; and that man had ho nous and ho thumos in common with other animals, but he alone had hai phrenes. Here ho nous and ho thumos must denote the understanding and the sensibility, and hai phrenes, the reason. Plutarch de Placit. 4, 21, says that the Stoics called the supreme faculty of the mind (to hêgemonikon tês psuchês) ho logismos, reason. Cic. sometimes speaks of a twofold division; as, Est animus in partes tributus duas, quarum altera rationis est particeps, altera expers (i. e. to logistikon and to alogon of Plato; cf. Tert. Anim. 16), i. e. the reason or intellect and the sensibility, Tusc. 2, 21, 47; so id. Off. 1, 28, 101; 1, 36, 132; id. Tusc 4, 5, 10; and again of a threefold; as, Plato triplicem finxit animum, cujus principatum, id est rationem in capite sicut in arce posuit, et duas partes ( the two other parts) ei parere voluit, iram et cupiditatem, quas locis disclusit; iram in pectore, cupiditatem subter praecordia locavit, i. e. the reason or intellect, and the sensibility here resolved into desire and aversion, id. ib. 1, 10, 20; so id. Ac. 2, 39, 124. The will, hê boulêsis, voluntas, arbitrium, seems to have been sometimes merged in the sensibility, ho thumos, animus, animi, sensus, and sometimes identified with the intellect or reason, ho nous, ho logismos, mens, ratio).
    A.
    1.. The general power of perception and thought, the reason, intellect, mind (syn.: mens, ratio, ingenium), ho nous:

    cogito cum meo animo,

    Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 13; so Ter. Ad. 3, 4, 55:

    cum animis vestris cogitare,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 24:

    recordari cum animo,

    id. Clu. 25, 70;

    and without cum: animo meditari,

    Nep. Ages. 4, 1; cf. id. Ham. 4, 2:

    cogitare volvereque animo,

    Suet. Vesp. 5:

    animo cogitare,

    Vulg. Eccli. 37, 9:

    statuere apud animum,

    Liv. 34, 2:

    proposui in animo meo,

    Vulg. Eccli. 1, 12:

    nisi me animus fallit, hi sunt, etc.,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 9, 23:

    in dubio est animus,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 31; id. ib. prol. 1; cf. id. ib. 1, 1, 29:

    animum ad se ipsum advocamus,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 31, 75:

    lumen animi, ingenii consiliique tui,

    id. Rep. 6, 12 al. —

    For the sake of rhet. fulness, animus often has a synonym joined with it: Mens et animus et consilium et sententia civitatis posita est in legibus,

    Cic. Clu. 146:

    magnam cui mentem animumque Delius inspirat vates,

    Verg. A. 6, 11:

    complecti animo et cogitatione,

    Cic. Off. 1, 32, 117; id. de Or. 1, 2, 6:

    animis et cogitatione comprehendere,

    id. Fl. 27, 66:

    cum omnia ratione animoque lustraris,

    id. Off. 1, 17, 56:

    animorum ingeniorumque naturale quoddam quasi pabulum consideratio naturae,

    id. Ac. 2, 41, 127.—Hence the expressions: agitatio animi, attentio, contentio; animi adversio; applicatio animi; judicium, opinio animorum, etc. (v. these vv.); and animum advertere, adjungere, adplicare, adpellere, inducere, etc. (v. these vv.).—
    2.
    Of particular faculties of mind, the memory:

    etiam nunc mihi Scripta illa dicta sunt in animo Chrysidis,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 46:

    An imprimi, quasi ceram, animum putamus etc. (an idea of Aristotle's),

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 25, 61:

    ex animo effluere,

    id. de Or. 2, 74, 300: omnia fert aetas, animum quoque;

    ... Nunc oblita mihi tot carmina,

    Verg. E. 9, 51.—
    3.
    Consciousness (physically considered) or the vital power, on which consciousness depends ( = conscientia, q. v. II. A., or anima, q. v. II. E.):

    vae miserae mihi. Animo malest: aquam velim,

    I'm fainting, my wits are going, Plaut. Am. 5, 1, 6; id. Curc. 2, 3, 33:

    reliquit animus Sextium gravibus acceptis vulneribus,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 38:

    Una eademque via sanguis animusque sequuntur,

    Verg. A. 10, 487:

    animusque reliquit euntem,

    Ov. M. 10, 459:

    nisi si timor abstulit omnem Sensum animumque,

    id. ib. 14, 177:

    linqui deinde animo et submitti genu coepit,

    Curt. 4, 6, 20: repente animo linqui solebat, Suet. Caes. 45:

    ad recreandos defectos animo puleio,

    Plin. 20, 14, 54, § 152.—
    4.
    The conscience, in mal. part. (v. conscientia, II. B. 2. b.):

    cum conscius ipse animus se remordet,

    Lucr. 4, 1135:

    quos conscius animus exagitabat,

    Sall. C. 14, 3:

    suae malae cogitationes conscientiaeque animi terrent,

    Cic. Sex. Rosc. 67.—
    5.
    In Plaut. very freq., and once also in Cic., meton. for judicium, sententia, opinion, judgment; mostly meo quidem animo or meo animo, according to my mind, in my opinion, Plaut. Men. 1, 3, 17:

    e meo quidem animo aliquanto facias rectius, si, etc.,

    id. Aul. 3, 6, 3:

    meo quidem animo, hic tibi hodie evenit bonus,

    id. Bacch. 1, 1, 69; so id. Aul. 3, 5, 4; id. Curc. 4, 2, 28; id. Bacch. 3, 2, 10; id. Ep. 1, 2, 8; id. Poen. 1, 2, 23; id. Rud. 4, 4, 94; Cic. Sest. 22:

    edepol lenones meo animo novisti,

    Plaut. Curc. 4, 2, 19:

    nisi, ut meus est animus, fieri non posse arbitror,

    id. Cist. 1, 1, 5 (cf.:

    EX MEI ANIMI SENTENTIA,

    Inscr. Orell. 3665:

    ex animi tui sententia,

    Cic. Off. 3, 29, 108).—
    6.
    The imagination, the fancy (for which Cic. often uses cogitatio, as Ac. 2, 15, 48):

    cerno animo sepultam patriam, miseros atque insepultos acervos civium,

    Cic. Cat. 4, 6, 11:

    fingere animo jubebat aliquem etc.,

    id. Sen. 12, 41: Fingite animis;

    litterae enim sunt cogitationes nostrae, et quae volunt, sic intuentur, ut ea cernimus, quae videmus,

    id. Mil. 29, 79:

    Nihil animo videre poterant,

    id. Tusc. 1, 16, 38.—
    B.
    The power of feeling, the sensibility, the heart, the feelings, affections, inclinations, disposition, passions (either honorable or base; syn.: sensus, adfectus, pectus, cor), ho thumos.
    1.
    a.. In gen., heart, soul, spirit, feeling, inclination, affection, passion: Medea, animo aegra, amore saevo saucia, Enn. ap. Auct. ad Her. 2, 22 (cf. Plaut. Truc. 2, 7, 36:

    animo hercle homo suo est miser): tu si animum vicisti potius quam animus te, est quod gaudeas, etc.,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 27 -29:

    harum scelera et lacrumae confictae dolis Redducunt animum aegrotum ad misericordiam,

    Ter. And. 3, 3, 27:

    Quo gemitu conversi animi (sunt),

    Verg. A. 2, 73:

    Hoc fletu concussi animi,

    id. ib. 9, 498;

    4, 310: animum offendere,

    Cic. Lig. 4; id. Deiot. 33; so Vulg. Gen. 26, 35.—Mens and animus are often conjoined and contrasted, mind and heart (cf. the Homeric kata phrena kai kata thumon, in mind and heart): mentem atque animum delectat suum, entertains his mind and delights his heart, Enn. ap. Gell. 19, 10:

    Satin tu sanus mentis aut animi tui?

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 53:

    mala mens, malus animus,

    bad mind, bad heart, Ter. And. 1, 1, 137:

    animum et mentem meam ipsa cogitatione hominum excellentium conformabam,

    Cic. Arch. 6, 14:

    Nec vero corpori soli subveniendum est, sed menti atque animo multo magis,

    id. Sen. 11, 36:

    ut omnium mentes animosque perturbaret,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 39; 1, 21:

    Istuc mens animusque fert,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 14, 8:

    Stare Socrates dicitur tamquam quodam recessu mentis atque animi facto a corpore,

    Gell. 2, 1; 15, 2, 7.—

    And very rarely with this order inverted: Jam vero animum ipsum mentemque hominis, etc.,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 59, 147:

    mente animoque nobiscum agunt,

    Tac. G. 29:

    quem nobis animum, quas mentes imprecentur,

    id. H. 1, 84;

    and sometimes pleon. without such distinction: in primis regina quietum Accipit in Teucros animum mentemque benignam,

    a quiet mind and kindly heart, Verg. A. 1, 304; so,

    pravitas animi atque ingenii,

    Vell. 2, 112, 7 (for mens et animus, etc., in the sense of thought, used as a pleonasm, v. supra, II. A. 1.):

    Verum animus ubi semel se cupiditate devinxit mala, etc.,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 34:

    animus perturbatus et incitatus nec cohibere se potest, nec quo loco vult insistere,

    Cic. Tusc. 4, 18, 41:

    animum comprimit,

    id. ib. 2, 22, 53:

    animus alius ad alia vitia propensior,

    id. ib. 4, 37, 81; id. ad Q. Fr. 1, 1:

    sed quid ego hic animo lamentor,

    Enn. Ann. 6, 40:

    tremere animo,

    Cic. ad Q. Fr. 1, 1, 4:

    ingentes animo concipit iras,

    Ov. M. 1, 166:

    exsultare animo,

    id. ib. 6, 514.—So often ex animo, from the heart, from the bottom of one's heart, deeply, truly, sincerely:

    Paulum interesse censes ex animo omnia facias an de industria?

    from your heart or with some design, Ter. And. 4, 4, 55; id. Ad. 1, 1, 47:

    nisi quod tibi bene ex animo volo,

    id. Heaut. 5, 2, 6: verbum [p. 124] ex animo dicere, id. Eun. 1, 2, 95:

    sive ex animo id fit sive simulate,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 67, 168:

    majore studio magisve ex animo petere non possum,

    id. Fam. 11, 22:

    ex animo vereque diligi,

    id. ib. 9, 6, 2:

    ex animo dolere,

    Hor. A. P. 432:

    quae (gentes) dederunt terram meam sibi cum gaudio et toto corde et ex animo,

    Vulg. Ezech. 36, 5; ib. Eph. 6, 6; ib. 1 Pet. 5, 3.—And with gen.
    (α).
    With verbs:

    Quid illam miseram animi excrucias?

    Plaut. Mil. 4, 2, 76; 4, 6, 65:

    Antipho me excruciat animi,

    Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 10:

    discrucior animi,

    id. Ad. 4, 4, 1:

    in spe pendebit animi,

    id. Heaut. 4, 4, 5: juvenemque animi miserata repressit, pitying him in her heart, thumôi phileousa te kêdomenê te (Hom. Il. 1, 196), Verg. A. 10, 686.—
    (β).
    With adjj.:

    aeger animi,

    Liv. 1, 58; 2, 36; 6, 10; Curt. 4, 3, 11; Tac. H. 3, 58:

    infelix animi,

    Verg. A. 4, 529:

    felix animi,

    Juv. 14, 159:

    victus animi,

    Verg. G. 4, 491:

    ferox animi,

    Tac. A. 1, 32:

    promptus animi,

    id. H. 2, 23:

    praestans animi,

    Verg. A. 12, 19:

    ingens animi,

    Tac. A. 1, 69 (for this gen. v. Ramsh. Gr. p. 323; Key, § 935; Wagner ad Plaut. Aul. v. 105; Draeger, Hist. Synt. I. p. 443).—
    b.
    Meton., disposition, character (so, often ingenium): nimis paene animo es Molli, Pac. ap. Cic. Tusc. 2, 21, 49:

    animo audaci proripit sese,

    Pac. Trag. Rel. p. 109 Rib.:

    petulans protervo, iracundo animo,

    Plaut. Bacch. 4, 3, 1; id. Truc. 4, 3, 1:

    ubi te vidi animo esse omisso (omisso = neglegenti, Don.),

    Ter. Heaut. 5, 2, 9; Cic. Fam. 2. 17 fin.:

    promptus animus vester,

    Vulg. 2 Cor. 9, 2: animis estis simplicibus et mansuetis nimium creditis unicuique, Auct. ad Her. 4, 37:

    eorum animi molles et aetate fluxi dolis haud difficulter capiebantur,

    Sall. C. 14, 5:

    Hecabe, Non oblita animorum, annorum oblita suorum,

    Ov. M. 13, 550:

    Nihil est tam angusti animi tamque parvi, quam amare divitias,

    Cic. Off. 1, 20, 68:

    sordidus atque animi parvi,

    Hor. S. 1, 2, 10; Vell. 2, 25, 3:

    Drusus animi fluxioris erat,

    Suet. Tib. 52.—
    2.
    In particular, some one specific emotion, inclination, or passion (honorable or base; in this signif., in the poets and prose writers, very freq. in the plur.). —
    a.
    Courage, spirit:

    ibi nostris animus additus est,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 94; cf. Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 31; id. And. 2, 1, 33:

    deficiens animo maesto cum corde jacebat,

    Lucr. 6, 1232:

    virtute atque animo resistere,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 2, 8:

    fac animo magno fortique sis,

    id. ib. 6, 14 fin.:

    Cassio animus accessit, et Parthis timor injectus est,

    id. Att. 5, 20, 3:

    nostris animus augetur,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 70:

    mihi in dies magis animus accenditur,

    Sall. C. 20, 6; Cic. Att. 5, 18; Liv. 8, 19; 44, 29:

    Nunc demum redit animus,

    Tac. Agr. 3:

    bellica Pallas adest, Datque animos,

    Ov. M. 5, 47:

    pares annis animisque,

    id. ib. 7, 558:

    cecidere illis animique manusque,

    id. ib. 7, 347 (cf.:

    tela viris animusque cadunt,

    id. F. 3, 225) et saep.—Hence, bono animo esse or uti, to be of good courage, Varr. R. R. 2, 5, 5: Am. Bono animo es. So. Scin quam bono animo sim? Plaut. Am. 22, 39:

    In re mala animo si bono utare, adjuvat,

    id. Capt. 2, 1, 9:

    bono animo fac sis,

    Ter. Ad. 3, 5, 1:

    quin tu animo bono es,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 4:

    quare bono animo es,

    Cic. Att. 5, 18; so Vulg. 2 Macc. 11, 26; ib. Act. 18, 25;

    so also, satis animi,

    sufficient courage, Ov. M. 3, 559.—Also for hope:

    magnus mihi animus est, hodiernum diem initium libertatis fore,

    Tac. Agr, 30.— Trop., of the violent, stormy motion of the winds of AEolus:

    Aeolus mollitque animos et temperat iras,

    Verg. A. 1, 57.—Of a top:

    dant animos plagae,

    give it new force, quicker motion, Verg. A. 7, 383.—

    Of spirit in discourse: in Asinio Pollione et consilii et animi satis,

    Quint. 10, 1, 113. —
    b.
    Haughtiness, arrogance, pride: quae civitas est in Asia, quae unius tribuni militum animos ac spiritus capere possit? can bear the arrogance and pride, etc., Cic. Imp. Pomp. 22, 66:

    jam insolentiam noratis hominis: noratis animos ejus ac spiritus tribunicios,

    id. Clu. 39, 109; so id. Caecin. 11 al.; Ov. Tr. 5, 8, 3 (cf.:

    quia paululum vobis accessit pecuniae, Sublati animi sunt,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 5, 56).—
    c.
    Violent passion, vehemence, wrath:

    animum vincere, iracundiam cohibere, etc.,

    Cic. Marcell. 3:

    animum rege, qui nisi paret Imperat,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 2, 62:

    qui dominatur animo suo,

    Vulg. Prov. 16, 32.—So often in plur.; cf hoi thumoi: ego meos animos violentos meamque iram ex pectore jam promam, Plaut. Truc. 2, 7, 43:

    vince animos iramque tuam,

    Ov. H. 3, 85; id. M. 8, 583; Prop. 1, 5, 12:

    Parce tuis animis, vita, nocere tibi,

    id. 2, 5, 18:

    Sic longius aevum Destruit ingentes animos,

    Luc. 8, 28:

    coeunt sine more, sine arte, Tantum animis iraque,

    Stat. Th. 11, 525 al. —
    d.
    Moderation, patience, calmness, contentedness, in the phrase aequus animus, an even mind:

    si est animus aequos tibi,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 10; id. Rud. 2, 3, 71; Cic. Rosc. Am. 50, 145; and often in the abl., aequo animo, with even mind, patiently, etc.:

    aequo animo ferre,

    Ter. And. 2, 3, 23; Cic. Tusc. 1, 39, 93; id. Sen. 23, 84; Nep. Dion. 6, 4; Liv. 5, 39:

    aequo animo esse,

    Vulg. 3 Reg. 21, 7; ib. Judith, 7, 23: Aequo animo est? of merry heart (Gr. euthumei), ib. Jac. 5, 13:

    animis aequis remittere,

    Cic. Clu. 2, 6:

    aequiore animo successorem opperiri,

    Suet. Tib. 25:

    haud aequioribus animis audire,

    Liv. 23, 22: sapientissimus quisque aequissimo animo moritur; stultissimus iniquissimo. Cic. Sen. 23, 83; so id. Tusc. 1, 45, 109; Sall. C. 3, 2; Suet. Aug. 56:

    iniquo animo,

    Att. Trag. Rel. p. 150 Rib.; Cic. Tusc. 2, 2, 5; Quint. 11, 1, 66.—
    e.
    Agreeable feeling, pleasure, delight:

    cubat amans animo obsequens,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 134:

    indulgent animis, et nulla quid utile cura est,

    Ov. M. 7, 566; so, esp. freq.: animi causa (in Plaut. once animi gratia), for the sake of amusement, diversion (cf.:

    haec (animalia) alunt animi voluptatisque causa,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 12):

    Post animi causa mihi navem faciam,

    Plaut. Rud. 4, 2, 27; so id. Trin. 2, 2, 53; id. Ep. 1, 1, 43:

    liberare fidicinam animi gratia,

    id. ib. 2, 2, 90:

    qui illud animi causa fecerit, hunc praedae causa quid facturum putabis?

    Cic. Phil. 7, 6:

    habet animi causa rus amoenum et suburbanum,

    id. Rosc. Am. 46 Matth.; cf. id. ib. § 134, and Madv. ad Cic. Fin. 2, 17, 56; Cic. Fam. 7, 2:

    Romanos in illis munitionibus animine causa cotidie exerceri putatis?

    Caes. B. G. 7, 77; Plin. praef. 17 Sill.—
    f.
    Disposition toward any one:

    hoc animo in nos esse debebis, ut etc.,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 1 fin.:

    meus animus erit in te semper, quem tu esse vis,

    id. ib. 5, 18 fin.:

    qui, quo animo inter nos simus, ignorant,

    id. ib. 3, 6; so id. ib. 4, 15;

    5, 2: In quo in primis quo quisque animo, studio, benevolentia fecerit, ponderandum est,

    id. Off. 1, 15, 49:

    quod (Allobroges) nondum bono animo in populum Romanum viderentur,

    to be well disposed, Caes. B. G. 1, 6 fin. —In the pregn. signif. of kind, friendly feeling, affection, kindness, liberality:

    animum fidemque praetorianorum erga se expertus est,

    Suet. Oth. 8:

    Nec non aurumque animusque Latino est,

    Verg. A. 12, 23.—Hence, meton., of a person who is loved, my heart, my soul:

    salve, anime mi,

    Plaut. Curc. 1, 2, 3:

    da, meus ocellus, mea rosa, mi anime, da, mea voluptas,

    id. As. 3, 3, 74; so id. ib. 5, 2, 90; id. Curc. 1, 3, 9; id. Bacch. 1, 1, 48; id. Most. 1, 4, 23; id. Men. 1, 3, 1; id. Mil. 4, 8, 20; id. Rud. 4, 8, 1; Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 15 et saep. —
    C.
    The power of willing, the will, inclination, desire, purpose, design, intention (syn.: voluntas, arbitrium, mens, consilium, propositum), hê boulêsis:

    qui rem publicam animo certo adjuverit,

    Att. Trag Rel. p. 182 Rib.:

    pro inperio tuo meum animum tibi servitutem servire aequom censui,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 23:

    Ex animique voluntate id procedere primum,

    goes forth at first from the inclination of the soul, Lucr. 2, 270; so,

    pro animi mei voluntate,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 20, 8 (v. Manut. ad h.l.):

    teneo, quid animi vostri super hac re siet,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 58; 1, 1, 187:

    Nam si semel tuom animum ille intellexerit, Prius proditurum te etc.,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 69:

    Prius quam tuom ut sese habeat animum ad nuptias perspexerit,

    id. And. 2, 3, 4:

    Sin aliter animus voster est, ego etc.,

    id. Ad. 3, 4, 46:

    Quid mi istaec narras? an quia non audisti, de hac re animus meus ut sit?

    id. Hec. 5, 2, 19:

    qui ab auro gazaque regia manus, oculos, animum cohibere possit,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 66:

    istum exheredare in animo habebat,

    id. Rosc. Am. 18, 52: nobis crat in animo Ciceronem ad Caesarem mittere, we had it in mind to send, etc., id. Fam. 14, 11; Serv. ad Cic. ib. 4, 12:

    hostes in foro constiterunt, hoc animo, ut, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 28:

    insurrexerunt uno animo in Paulum,

    with one mind, Vulg. Act. 18, 12; 19, 29: persequi Jugurtham animus ardebat, Sall. J. 39, 5 Gerlach (others, animo, as Dietsch); so id. de Rep. Ord. 1, 8: in nova fert an mus mutatas dicere formas, my mind inclines to tell of, etc., Ov. M. 1, 1.—Hence, est animus alicui, with inf., to have a mind for something, to aim at, etc.:

    omnibus unum Opprimere est animus,

    Ov. M. 5, 150:

    Sacra Jovi Stygio perficere est animus,

    Verg. A. 4, 639:

    Fuerat animus conjuratis corpus occisi in Tiberim trahere,

    Suet. Caes. 82 fin.; id. Oth. 6; cf. id. Calig. 56.—So, aliquid alicui in animo est, with inf., Tac. G. 3.—So, inducere in animum or animum, to resolve upon doing something; v. induco.—
    D.
    Trop., of the principle of life and activity in irrational objects, as in Engl. the word mind is used.
    1.
    Of brutes:

    in bestiis, quarum animi sunt rationis expertes,

    whose minds, Cic. Tusc. 1, 33, 80:

    Sunt bestiae, in quibus etiam animorum aliqua ex parte motus quosdam videmus,

    id. Fin. 5, 14, 38:

    ut non inscite illud dictum videatur in sue, animum illi pecudi datum pro sale, ne putisceret,

    id. ib. 5, 13, 38, ubi v. Madv.:

    (apes Ingentes animos angusto in pectore versant,

    Verg. G. 4, 83:

    Illiusque animos, qui multos perdidit unus, Sumite serpentis,

    Ov. M. 3, 544:

    cum pecudes pro regionis caelique statu et habitum corporis et ingenium animi et pili colorem gerant,

    Col. 6, 1, 1:

    Umbria (boves progenerat) vastos nec minus probabiles animis quam corporibus,

    id. 6, 1, 2 si equum ipsum nudum et solum corpus ejus et animum contemplamur, App. de Deo Socr. 23 (so sometimes mens:

    iniquae mentis asellus,

    Hor. S. 1, 9, 20).—
    2.
    Of plants:

    haec quoque Exuerint silvestrem animum, i. e. naturam, ingenium,

    their wild nature, Verg. G. 2, 51.—
    III.
    Transf. Of God or the gods, as we say, the Divine Mind, the Mind of God:

    certe et deum ipsum et divinum animum corpore liberatum cogitatione complecti possumus,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 22, 51 (so mens, of God, id. ib. 1, 22, 66; id. Ac. 2, 41, 126):

    Tantaene animis caelestibus irae?

    Verg. A. 1, 11.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > animus

  • 111 in

    1.
    in (old forms endŏ and indŭ, freq. in ante-class. poets; cf. Enn. ap. Gell. 12, 4; id. ap. Macr. S. 6, 2; Lucil. ap. Lact. 5, 9, 20; Lucr. 2, 1096; 5, 102; 6, 890 et saep.), prep. with abl. and acc. [kindr. with Sanscr. an; Greek en, en-tha, en-then, eis, i. e. en-s, ana; Goth. ana; Germ. in], denotes either rest or motion within or into a place or thing; opp. to ex; in, within, on, upon, among, at; into, to, towards.
    I.
    With abl.
    A.
    In space.
    1.
    Lit., in (with abl. of the place or thing in which):

    aliorum fructus in terra est, aliorum et extra,

    Plin. 19, 4, 22, § 61:

    alii in corde, alii in cerebro dixerunt animi esse sedem et locum,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 19:

    eo in rostris sedente suasit Serviliam legem Crassus,

    id. Brut. 43, 161:

    qui sunt cives in eadem re publica,

    id. Rep. 1, 32 fin.:

    facillimam in ea re publica esse concordiam, in qua idem conducat omnibus,

    id. ib.:

    T. Labienus ex loco superiore, quae res in nostris castris gererentur, conspicatus,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 26, 4:

    quod si in scaena, id est in contione verum valet, etc.,

    Cic. Lael. 26, 97:

    in foro palam Syracusis,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 33, § 81:

    plures in eo loco sine vulnere quam in proelio aut fuga intereunt,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 35:

    tulit de caede, quae in Appia via facta esset,

    Cic. Mil. 6, 15:

    in via fornicata,

    Liv. 22, 36:

    vigebat in illa domo mos patrius et disciplina,

    Cic. de Sen. 11, 37:

    in domo furtum factum ab eo qui domi fuit,

    Quint. 5, 10, 16:

    nupta in domo,

    Liv. 6, 34, 9:

    copias in castris continent,

    in, within, Caes. B. C. 1, 66:

    cum in angusto quodam pulpito stans diceret,

    Quint. 11, 3, 130:

    se ac suos in vehiculo conspici,

    Liv. 5, 40, 10:

    malo in illa tua sedecula sedere, quam in istorum sella curuli,

    Cic. Att. 4, 10:

    sedere in solio,

    id. Fin. 2, 21, 66:

    Albae constiterant, in urbe opportuna,

    id. Phil. 4, 2, 6. —

    Sometimes, also, with names of places: omnes se ultro sectari in Epheso memorat mulieres,

    Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 182:

    heri aliquot adolescentuli coiimus in Piraeo,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 4, 1:

    navis et in Cajeta est parata nobis et Brundisii,

    Cic. Att. 8, 3, 6:

    complures (naves) in Hispali faciendas curavit,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 18:

    caesos in Marathone ac Salamine,

    Quint. 12, 10, 24:

    in Berenice urbe Troglodytarum,

    Plin. 2, 73, 75, § 183.—
    2.
    In indicating a multitude or number, of, in, or among which a person or thing is, in, among (= gen. part.):

    in his poeta hic nomen profitetur suum,

    Ter. Eun. prol. 3:

    Thales, qui sapientissimus in septem fuit,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 11, 26:

    peto ut eum complectare, diligas, in tuis habeas,

    id. Fam. 13, 78, 2; cf.:

    in perditis et desperatis,

    id. ib. 13, 56, 1:

    omnia quae secundum naturam fiunt, sunt habenda in bonis,

    id. de Sen. 19, 71:

    dolor in maximis malis ducitur,

    id. Leg. 1, 11, 31:

    justissimus unus in Teucris,

    Verg. A. 2, 426:

    cecidere in pugna ad duo milia... in his quatuor Romani centuriones,

    Liv. 27, 12, 16:

    in diis et feminae sunt,

    Lact. 1, 16, 17.—
    3.
    Of analogous relations of place or position:

    sedere in equo,

    on horseback, id. Verr. 2, 5, 10:

    quid legati in equis,

    id. Pis. 25, 60:

    sedere in leone,

    Plin. 35, 10, 36, § 109:

    in eo flumine pons erat,

    on, over, Caes. B. G. 2, 5:

    in herboso Apidano,

    on the banks of, Prop. 1, 3, 6:

    in digitis,

    on tiptoe, Val. Fl. 4, 267:

    castra in limite locat,

    on the rampart, Tac. A. 1, 50:

    ipse coronam habebat unam in capite, alteram in collo,

    on, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11, § 27:

    oleae in arbore,

    Cels. 2, 24:

    Caesaris in barbaris erat nomen obscurius,

    among, Caes. B. C. 1, 61:

    in ceteris nationibus, Cels. praef. 1: qui in Brutiis praeerat,

    Liv. 25, 16, 7:

    in juvenibus,

    Quint. 11, 1, 32:

    nutus in mutis pro sermone est,

    id. 11, 3, 66.—Of dress, like cum, q. v.:

    in veste candida,

    Liv. 45, 20, 5; 34, 7, 3:

    in calceis,

    id. 24, 38, 2:

    in insignibus,

    id. 5, 41, 2:

    in tunicis albis,

    Plin. Ep. 7, 27, 13:

    in Persico et vulgari habitu,

    Curt. 3, 3, 4:

    in lugubri veste,

    id. 10, 5, 17:

    in Tyriis,

    Ov. A. A. 2, 297:

    in Cois,

    id. ib. v. 298; cf.:

    homines in catenis Romam mittere,

    Liv. 29, 21, 12; 32, 1, 8: quis multa te in rosa urget, etc., Hor C. 1, 5, 1; so, in viola aut in rosa, Cic. Tusc. [p. 912] 5, 26, 73.—So of arms:

    duas legiones in armis,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 11, 6; cf. Verg. A. 3, 395:

    in armis hostis,

    under arms, Ov. M. 12,65:

    quae in ore atque in oculis provinciae gesta sunt (= coram),

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 33, § 81; so,

    in oculis provinciae,

    id. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 2:

    in oculis omnium,

    id. ib. 1, 3, 7:

    divitiae, decus, gloria in oculis sita sunt,

    Sall. C. 20, 14; Curt. 4, 13, 1; Liv. 22, 12, 6:

    Julianus in ore ejus (Vitellii) jugulatur,

    Tac. H. 3, 77; Sen. Ben. 7, 19, 7.—Of a passage in any writing (but when the author is named, by meton., for his works, apud is used, Krebs, Antibarb. p. 561):

    in populorum institutis aut legibus,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 15, 42:

    in illis libris qui sunt de natura deorum,

    id. Fat. 1, 1:

    in Timaeo dicit,

    id. N. D. 1, 12, 30:

    epistula, in qua omnia perscripta erant,

    Nep. Pelop. 3, 2:

    perscribit in litteris, hostes ab se discessisse,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 49; but in is also used with an author's name when, not a place in his book, but a feature of his style, etc., is referred to:

    in Thucydide orbem modo orationis desidero,

    Cic. Or. 71, 234:

    in Herodoto omnia leniter fluunt,

    Quint. 9, 4, 18.—Of books:

    libri oratorii diu in manibus fuerunt,

    Cic. Att. 4, 13, 2; id. Lael. 25, 96; but more freq. trop.: in manibus habere, tenere, etc., to be engaged, occupied with, to have under control or within reach:

    philosophi quamcunque rem habent in manibus,

    id. Tusc. 5, 7, 18:

    quam spem nunc habeat in manibus, exponam,

    id. Verr. 1, 6, 16:

    rem habere in manibus,

    id. Att. 6, 3, 1; cf.:

    neque mihi in manu fuit Jugurtha qualis foret,

    in my power, Sall. J. 14, 4:

    postquam nihil esse in manu sua respondebatur,

    Liv. 32, 24, 2:

    quod ipsorum in manu sit,... bellum an pacem malint,

    Tac. A. 2, 46; but, cum tantum belli in manibus esset, was in hand, busied (cf.:

    inter manus),

    Liv. 4, 57, 1; so,

    quorum epistulas in manu teneo,

    Cic. Phil. 12, 4, 9; cf. id. Att. 2, 2, 2:

    in manu poculum tenens,

    id. Tusc. 1, 29, 71:

    coronati et lauream in manu tenentes,

    Liv. 40, 37, 3; Suet. Claud. 15 fin. —Of that which is thought of as existing in the mind, memory, character, etc.:

    in animo esse,

    Cic. Fam. 14, 11:

    in animo habere,

    id. Rosc. Am. 18, 52:

    lex est ratio insita in natura,

    id. Leg. 1, 6, 18:

    in memoria sedere,

    id. de Or. 2, 28, 122; cf.:

    tacito mutos volvunt in pectore questus,

    Luc. 1, 247:

    quanta auctoritas fuit in C. Metello!

    Cic. de Sen. 17, 61. —So freq. of a person's qualities of mind or character:

    erat in eo summa eloquentia, summa fides,

    Cic. Mur. 28, 58; cf.:

    in omni animante est summum aliquid atque optimum, ut in equis,

    id. Fin. 4, 41, 37:

    si quid artis in medicis est,

    Curt. 3, 5, 13; cf.:

    nibil esse in morte timendum,

    Lucr. 3, 866.— Esp., in eo loco, in that state or condition:

    in eo enim loco res sunt nostrae, ut, etc.,

    Liv. 7, 35, 7: si vos in eo loco essetis, quid aliud fecissetis? Cat. ap. Quint. 9, 2, 21; so,

    quo in loco, etc.: cum ex equitum et calonum fuga, quo in loco res essent, cognovissent,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 26:

    videtis, quo in loco res haec siet, Ter Phorm. 2, 4, 6: quod ipse, si in eodem loco esset, facturus fuerit,

    Liv. 37, 14, 5.—Hence, without loco, in eo esse ut, etc., to be in such a condition, etc.:

    non in eo esse Carthaginiensium res, ut Galliam armis obtineant,

    Liv. 30, 19, 3:

    cum res non in eo esset, ut Cyprum tentaret,

    id. 33, 41, 9; 8, 27, 3; 2, 17, 5; Nep. Mil. 7, 3; id. Paus. 5, 1 (cf. I. C. 1. infra).—
    B.
    In time, indicating its duration, in, during, in the course of:

    feci ego istaec itidem in adulescentia,

    in my youth, when I was young, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 6:

    in tempore hoc,

    Ter. And. 4, 5, 24:

    in hoc tempore,

    Tac. A. 13, 47:

    in tali tempore,

    Sall. C. 48, 5; Liv. 22, 35; 24, 28 al.:

    in diebus paucis,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 77:

    in brevi spatio,

    id. Heaut. 5, 2, 2; Suet. Vesp. 4:

    in qua aetate,

    Cic. Brut. 43 fin.:

    in ea aetate,

    Liv. 1, 57:

    in omni aetate,

    Cic. de Sen. 3, 9:

    in aetate, qua jam Alexander orbem terrarum subegisset,

    Suet. Caes. 7:

    qua (sc. Iphigenia) nihil erat in eo quidem anno natum pulchrius,

    in the course of, during the year, Cic. Off. 3, 25, 95 (al. eo quidem anno):

    nihil in vita se simile fecisse,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 91: nihil in vita vidit calamitatis A. Cluentius. id. Clu. 6, 18:

    in tota vita inconstans,

    id. Tusc. 4, 13, 29.—
    b.
    In tempore, at the right or proper time, in time (Cic. uses only tempore; v. tempus): eccum ipsum video in tempore huc se recipere, Ter. Phorm. 2, 4, 24:

    ni pedites equitesque in tempore subvenissent,

    Liv. 33, 5:

    spreta in tempore gloria interdum cumulatior redit,

    id. 2, 47:

    rebellaturi,

    Tac. A. 12, 50:

    atque adeo in ipso tempore eccum ipsum obviam,

    Ter. And. 3, 2, 52: in tempore, opportune. Nos sine praepositione dicimus tempore et tempori, Don. ad Ter. And. 4, 4, 19.—
    c.
    In praesentia and in praesenti, at present, now, at this moment, under these circumstances:

    sic enim mihi in praesentia occurrit,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 8, 14:

    vestrae quidem cenae non solum in praesentia, sed etiam postero die jucundae sunt,

    id. ib. 5, 35, 100:

    id quod unum maxime in praesentia desiderabatur,

    Liv. 21, 37:

    haec ad te in praesenti scripsi, ut, etc.,

    for the present, Cic. Fam. 2, 10, 4.—
    d.
    With gerunds and fut. pass. participles, to indicate duration of time, in:

    fit, ut distrahatur in deliberando animus,

    Cic. Off. 1, 3, 9; id. Fam. 2, 6, 2:

    vitiosum esse in dividendo partem in genere numerare,

    id. Fin. 2, 9, 26:

    quod in litteris dandis praeter consuetudinem proxima nocte vigilarat,

    id. Cat. 3, 3, 6:

    ne in quaerendis suis pugnandi tempus dimitteret,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 21:

    in agris vastandis incendiisque faciendis hostibus,

    in laying waste, id. ib. 5, 19:

    in excidenda Numantia,

    Cic. Off. 1, 22, 76:

    cum in immolanda Iphigenia tristis Calchas esset,

    id. Or. 21, 74.—
    C.
    In other relations, where a person or thing is thought of as in a certain condition, situation, or relation, in:

    qui magno in aere alieno majores etiam possessiones habent,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 8, 18:

    se in insperatis repentinisque pecuniis jactare,

    id. Cat. 2, 9, 20:

    Larinum in summo timore omnium cum armatis advolavit,

    id. Clu. 8, 25.—

    So freq., of qualities or states of mind: summa in sollicitudine ac timore Parthici belli,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 31:

    torpescentne dextrae in amentia illa?

    Liv. 23, 9, 7:

    hunc diem perpetuum in laetitia degere,

    Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 5; Cic. Cat. 4, 1, 2:

    in metu,

    Tac. A. 14, 43:

    in voluptate,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 19, 62:

    alicui in amore esse,

    beloved, id. Verr. 2, 4, 1, § 3:

    alicui in amoribus esse,

    id. Att. 6, 1, 12:

    res in invidia erat,

    Sall. J. 25, 5; Liv. 29, 37, 17: sum in expectatione omnium rerum, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 4, 10:

    num... Diogenem Stoicum coegit in suis studiis obmutescere senectus?

    in his studies, Cic. de Sen. 7, 21:

    mirificam cepi voluptatem ex tua diligentia: quod in summis tuis occupationibus mihi tamen rei publicae statum per te notum esse voluisti,

    even in, notwithstanding your great occupations, id. Fam. 3, 11, 4.—

    So freq., of business, employment, occupations, etc.: in aliqua re versari,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 47, § 105:

    similia iis, quae in consilio dixerat,

    Curt. 5, 5, 23:

    in certamine armorum atque in omni palaestra quid satis recte cavetur,

    Quint. 9, 4, 8:

    agi in judiciis,

    id. 11, 1, 78:

    tum vos mihi essetis in consilio,

    Cic. Rep. 3, 18, 28:

    in actione... dicere,

    Quint. 8, 2, 2.—Of an office, magistracy:

    in quo tum magistratu forte Brutus erat,

    Liv. 1, 59, 7; 4, 17, 1:

    in eo magistratu pari diligentia se praebuit,

    Nep. Han. 7, 5 (cf. B. 1. supra):

    in ea ipsa causa fuit eloquentissimus,

    Cic. Brut, 43, 160:

    qui non defendit nec obsistit, si potest, injuriae, tam est in vitio, quam, etc.,

    is in the wrong, acts wrongly, id. Off. 1, 7, 23:

    etsi hoc quidem est in vitio, dissolutionem naturae tam valde perhorrescere,

    is wrong, id. Fin. 5, 11, 31:

    non sunt in eo genere tantae commoditates corporis,

    id. ib. 4, 12, 29; cf.:

    an omnino nulla sit in eo genere distinctio,

    id. Or. 61, 205:

    Drusus erat de praevaricatione absolutus in summa quatuor sententiis,

    on the whole, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 16; cf.:

    et in omni summa, ut mones, valde me ad otium pacemque converto,

    id. ib. 3, 5, 5;

    but, in summa, sic maxime judex credit, etc.,

    in a word, in fine, Quint. 9, 2, 72; Auct. B. Alex. 71; Just. 37, 1, 8:

    horum (juvenum) inductio in parte simulacrum decurrentis exercitus erat: ex parte elegantioris exercitii quam militaris artis,

    in part, Liv. 44, 9, 5; cf.:

    quod mihi in parte verum videtur,

    Quint. 2, 8, 6:

    patronorum in parte expeditior, in parte difficilior interrogatio est,

    id. 5, 7, 22:

    hoc facere in eo homine consueverunt,

    in the case of, Caes. B. G. 7, 21:

    in furibus aerarii,

    Sall. C. 52, 12:

    Achilles talis in hoste fuit,

    Verg. A. 2, 540:

    in hoc homine saepe a me quaeris, etc.,

    in the case of, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 3, § 6: in nominibus impiis, Sall. C. 51, 15:

    suspectus et in morte matris fuit,

    Suet. Vit. 14:

    qui praesentes metuunt, in absentia hostes erunt, = absentes,

    Curt. 6, 3, 8 (cf. I. B. c. supra).—Of the meaning of words, etc.:

    non solum in eodem sensu, sed etiam in diverso, eadem verba contra,

    Quint. 9, 3, 36:

    aliter voces aut eaedem in diversa significatione ponuntur,

    id. 9, 3, 69:

    Sallustius in significatione ista non superesse sed superare dicit,

    Gell. 1, 22, 15:

    stips non dicitur in significatione trunci,

    Charis. 1, 18, 39:

    semper in significatione ea hortus,

    Plin. 19, 4, 19, § 50. —
    2.
    In with abl. of adjj. is used with the verbs esse and habere to express quality:

    cum exitus haud in facili essent, i. e. haud faciles,

    Liv. 3, 8, 9:

    adeo moderatio tuendae libertatis in difficili est,

    id. 3, 8, 11; 3, 65, 11; but mostly with adjj. of the first and second declension:

    in obscuro esse, Liv. praef. § 3: in dubio esse,

    id. 2, 3, 1; 3, 19, 8; Ov. H. 19, 174:

    dum in dubiost animus,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 31; 2, 2, 10:

    in integro esse,

    Cic. Fam. 15, 16, 3; id. Att. 11, 15, 4:

    in incerto esse,

    Liv. 5, 28, 5:

    in obvio esse,

    id. 37, 23, 1:

    in tuto esse,

    id. 38, 4, 10; cf.:

    videre te in tuto,

    Cat. 30, 6:

    in aequo esse,

    Liv. 39, 37, 14; Tac. A. 2, 44:

    in expedito esse,

    Curt. 4, 2, 22:

    in proximo esse,

    Quint. 1, 3, 4:

    in aperto esse,

    Sall. C. 5, 3:

    in promisco esse,

    Liv. 7, 17, 7:

    in augusto esse,

    Cels. 5, 27, 2:

    in incerto haberi,

    Sall. J. 46, 8; Tac. A. 15, 17:

    in levi habitum,

    id. H. 2, 21; cf.:

    in incerto relinquere,

    Liv. 5, 28, 5; Tac. H. 2, 83.
    II.
    With acc.
    A.
    In space, with verbs of motion, into or to a place or thing (rarely with names of towns and small islands;

    v. Zumpt, Gram. § 398): influxit non tenuis quidam e Graecia rivulus in hanc urbem,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 19:

    in Ephesum advenit,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 1, 35:

    in Epirum venire,

    Cic. Att. 13, 25, 3:

    ibo in Piraeeum, visamque, ecquae advenerit in portum ex Epheso navis mercatoria,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 2: venio ad Piraeea, in quo magis reprehendendus sum, quod... Piraeea scripserim, non Piraeeum, quam in quod addiderim;

    non enim hoc ut oppido praeposui, sed ut loco,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 10:

    se contulisse Tarquinios, in urbem Etruriae florentissimam,

    id. Rep. 2, 19:

    remigrare in domum veterem e nova,

    id. Ac. 1, 4, 13:

    cum in sua rura venerunt,

    id. Tusc. 5, 35, 102:

    a te ipso missi in ultimas gentes,

    id. Fam. 15, 9:

    in Ubios legatos mittere,

    Caes. B. G. 4, 11:

    dein Thalam pervenit, in oppidum magnum et opulentum,

    Sall. J. 75, 1:

    Regillum antiquam in patriam se contulerat,

    Liv. 3, 58, 1:

    abire in exercitum,

    Plaut. Am. prol. 102.— With nuntio:

    cum id Zmyrnam in contionem nuntiatum est,

    Tac. A. 4, 56:

    nuntiatur in castra,

    Lact. Most. Pers. 46; cf.:

    allatis in castra nuntiis,

    Tac. H. 4, 32: in manus sumere, tradere, etc., into one's hands:

    iste unumquodque vas in manus sumere,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 27, § 63:

    Falerios se in manus Romanis tradidisse,

    Liv. 5, 27, 3.—Rarely with the verbs ponere, collocare, etc. (pregn., i. e. to bring into... and place there):

    in crimen populo ponere,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 10:

    ut liberos, uxores suaque omnia in silvas deponerent,

    Caes. B. G. 4, 19:

    duplam pecuniam in thesauros reponi,

    Liv. 29, 19, 7:

    prius me collocavi in arborem,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 8, 6:

    sororem et propinquas suas nuptum in alias civitates collocasse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18.— Motion in any direction, up to, to, into, down to:

    in caelum ascendere,

    Cic. Lael. 23 fin.:

    filium ipse paene in umeros suos extulisset,

    id. de Or. 1, 53, 228:

    tamquam in aram confugitis ad deum,

    up to the altar, id. Tusc. 3, 10, 25:

    Saturno tenebrosa in Tartara misso,

    Ov. M. 1, 113:

    in flumen deicere,

    Cic. Rosc. Am. 25, 70; Nep. Chab. 4, 3.—
    2.
    Denoting mere direction towards a place or thing, and hence sometimes joined with versus, towards:

    quid nunc supina sursum in caelum conspicis,

    Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 78:

    si in latus aut dextrum aut sinistrum, ut ipsi in usu est, cubat,

    Cels. 2, 3:

    Belgae spectant in septentriones et orientem solem,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1:

    in orientem Germaniae, in occidentem Hispaniae obtenditur, Gallis in meridiem etiam inspicitur,

    Tac. Agr. 10:

    in laevum prona nixus sedet Inachus urna,

    Stat. Th. 2, 218.—With versus:

    castra ex Biturigibus movet in Arvernos versus,

    towards, Caes. B. G. 7, 8 fin.:

    in Galliam versus movere,

    Sall. C. 56, 4: in [p. 913] ltaliam versus, Front. Strat. 1, 4, 11:

    si in urbem versus venturi erant,

    Plin. Ep. 10, 82. —
    3.
    So of that which is thought of as entering into the mind, memory, etc. (cf. I. A. 2. fin.):

    in memoriam reducere,

    Cic. Inv 1, 52, 98:

    in animum inducere,

    Liv. 27, 9:

    in mentem venire,

    Cic. Fam. 7, 3:

    frequens imitatio transit in mores,

    Quint. 1, 11, 3. —

    Or into a writing or speech: in illam Metellinam orationem addidi quaedam,

    Cic. Att. 1, 13, 5.—
    B.
    In time, into, till, for:

    dormiet in lucem,

    into the daylight, till broad day, Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 34:

    statim e somno, quem plerumque in diem extrahunt, lavantur,

    Tac. G. 22: sermonem in multam noctem produximus, deep into the night, Cic. Rep. Fragm. ap. Arus. Mess. p. 239 Lindem.:

    in multam noctem luxit,

    Suet. Tib. 74:

    si febris in noctem augetur,

    Cels. 7, 27:

    dixit in noctem atque etiam nocte illatis lucernis,

    Plin. Ep. 4, 9, 14:

    indutias in triginta annos impetraverunt,

    for thirty years, Liv. 9, 37, 12; 7, 20, 8:

    nisi id verbum in omne tempus perdidissem,

    forever, Cic. Fam. 5, 15, 1:

    ad cenam hominem in hortos invitavit in posterum diem,

    for the following day, id. Off. 3, 14, 58:

    audistis auctionem constitutam in mensem Januarium,

    id. Agr. 1, 2, 4:

    subito reliquit annum suum seque in annum proximum transtulit,

    id. Mil. 9, 24:

    solis defectiones itemque lunae praedicuntur in multos annos,

    for many years, id. Div. 2, 6, 17:

    postero die Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie,

    Liv. 27, 2:

    qui ab matutino tempore duraverunt in occasum,

    Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99:

    seritur (semen lini) a Kalendis Octobribus in ortum aquilae,

    Col. 2, 10, 17.—With usque:

    neque illi didicerunt haec usque in senectutem,

    Quint. 12, 11, 20:

    in illum usque diem servati,

    id. 8, 3, 68:

    in serum usque patente cubiculo,

    Suet. Oth. 11:

    regnum trahat usque in tempora fati,

    Sil. 11, 392: in posterum (posteritatem) or in futurum, in future, for the future: in praesens, for the present: in perpetuum or in aeternum, forever:

    sancit in posterum, ne quis, etc.,

    Cic. Cat. 4, 5, 10:

    res dilata est in posterum,

    id. Fam. 10, 12, 3:

    video quanta tempestas invidiae nobis, si minus in praesens, at in posteritatem impendeat,

    id. Cat. 1, 9, 22:

    id aegre et in praesentia hi passi et in futurum etiam metum ceperunt,

    Liv. 34, 27, 10; cf.:

    ingenti omnium et in praesens laetitia et in futurum spe,

    id. 30, 17, 1:

    effugis in futurum,

    Tac. H. 1, 71:

    quod eum tibi quaestoris in loco constitueras, idcirco tibi amicum in perpetuum fore putasti?

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 30; cf.:

    oppidum omni periculo in perpetuum liberavit,

    id. Fam. 13, 4, 2:

    quae (leges) non in tempus aliquod, sed perpetuae utilitatis causa in aeternum latae sunt,

    Liv. 34, 6, 4: in tempus, for a while, for a short time, for the occasion (postAug.):

    sensit miles in tempus conficta,

    Tac. A. 1, 37:

    ne urbs sine imperio esset, in tempus deligebatur, qui jus redderet,

    id. ib. 6, 11:

    scaena in tempus structa,

    id. ib. 14, 20. —So in diem, for the day, to meet the day's want:

    nihil ex raptis in diem commeatibus superabat,

    Liv. 22, 40, 8:

    rapto in diem frumento,

    id. 4, 10, 1;

    but, cum illa fundum emisset in diem,

    i. e. a fixed day of payment, Nep. Att. 9, 5: in singulos dies, or simply in dies, with comparatives and verbs denoting increase, from day to day, daily:

    vitium in dies crescit,

    Vell. 2, 5, 2:

    in dies singulos breviores litteras ad te mitto,

    Cic. Att. 5, 7:

    qui senescat in dies,

    Liv. 22, 39, 15: in diem, daily:

    nos in diem vivimus,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 11, 33:

    in diem et horam,

    Hor. S. 2, 6, 47;

    and in horas,

    hourly, id. C. 2, 13, 14; id. S. 2, 7, 10.—
    C.
    In other relations, in which an aiming at, an inclining or striving towards a thing, is conceivable, on, about, respecting; towards, against; for, as; in, to; into:

    id, quod apud Platonem est in philosophos dictum,

    about the philosophers, Cic. Off. 1, 9, 28:

    Callimachi epigramma in Ambraciotam Cleombrotum est,

    id. Tusc. 1, 34, 84; cf.:

    cum cenaret Simonides apud Scopam cecinissetque id car men, quod in eum scripsisset, etc.,

    id. de Or. 2, 86, 352:

    quo amore tandem inflammati esse debemus in ejus modi patriam,

    towards, id. ib. 1, 44, 196:

    in liberos nostros indulgentia,

    id. ib. 2, 40, 168:

    de suis meritis in rem publicam aggressus est dicere,

    id. Or. 38, 133: ita ad impietatem in deos, in homines adjunxit injuriam, against, id. N. D. 3, 34 fin.:

    in dominum quaeri,

    to be examined as a witness against, id. Mil. 22, 60:

    in eos impetum facere,

    id. Att. 2, 22, 1:

    invehi in Thebanos,

    Nep. Epam. 6, 1; id. Tim. 5, 3:

    quaecumque est hominis definitio, una in omnes valet,

    id. Leg. 1, 10, 29:

    num etiam in deos immortales inauspicatam legem valuisse?

    Liv. 7, 6, 11:

    vereor coram in os te laudare amplius,

    to your face, Ter. Ad. 2, 4, 5:

    si in me exerciturus (pugnos), quaeso, in parietem ut primum domes,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 168:

    in puppim rediere rates,

    Luc. 3, 545 Burm. (cf.:

    sic equi dicuntur in frena redire, pulsi in terga recedere, Sulp. ad loc.): Cumis eam vidi: venerat enim in funus: cui funeri ego quoque operam dedi,

    to the funeral, to take charge of the funeral, Cic. Att. 15, 1, B:

    se quisque eum optabat, quem fortuna in id certamen legeret,

    Liv. 21, 42, 2:

    quodsi in nullius mercedem negotia eant, pauciora fore,

    Tac. A. 11, 6:

    haec civitas mulieri redimiculum praebeat, haec in collum, haec in crines,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 33:

    Rhegium quondam in praesidium missa legio,

    Liv. 28, 28; so,

    datae in praesidium cohortes,

    Tac. H. 4, 35: hoc idem significat Graecus ille in eam sententiam versus, to this effect or purport, Cic. Div. 2, 10, 25; cf. id. Fam. 9, 15, 4:

    haec et in eam sententiam cum multa dixisset,

    id. Att. 2, 22:

    qui omnia sic exaequaverunt, ut in utramque partem ita paria redderent, uti nulla selectione uterentur,

    id. Fin. 3, 4, 12:

    in utramque partem disputat,

    on both sides, for and against, id. Off. 3, 23, 89: te rogo, me tibi in omnes partes defendendum putes, Vatin. ap. Cic. Fam. 5, 10 fin.:

    facillime et in optimam partem cognoscuntur adulescentes, qui se ad claros et sapientes viros contulerunt,

    id. Off. 2, 13, 46:

    cives Romani servilem in modum cruciati et necati,

    in the manner of slaves, Cic. Verr. 1, 5, 13; cf.:

    miserandum in modum milites populi Romani capti, necati sunt,

    id. Prov. Cons. 3, 5:

    senior quidam Veiens vaticinantis in modum cecinit,

    Liv. 5, 15, 4;

    also: domus et villae in urbium modum aedificatae,

    Sall. C. 12, 3:

    perinde ac si in hanc formulam omnia judicia legitima sint,

    Cic. Rosc. Com. 5, 15:

    judicium quin acciperet in ea ipsa verba quae Naevius edebat, non recusasse,

    id. Quint. 20, 63; cf.:

    senatusconsultum in haec verba factum,

    Liv. 30, 43, 9:

    pax data Philippo in has leges est,

    id. 33, 30:

    Gallia omnis divisa est in partes tres,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 1; cf.:

    quae quidem in confirmationem et reprehensionem dividuntur,

    Cic. Part. Or. 9, 33: describebat censores binos in singulas civitates, i. e. for or over each state, id. Verr. 2, 2, 53; cf. id. ib. 2, 4, 26:

    itaque Titurium Tolosae quaternos denarios in singulas vini amphoras portorii nomine exegisse,

    id. Font. 5, 9:

    extulit eum plebs sextantibus collatis in capita,

    a head, for each person, Liv. 2, 33 fin.:

    Macedonibus treceni nummi in capita statutum est pretium,

    id. 32, 17, 2; cf.:

    Thracia in Rhoemetalcen filium... inque liberos Cotyis dividitur (i. e. inter),

    Tac. A. 2, 67.—
    2.
    Of the object or end in view, regarded also as the motive of action or effect:

    non te in me illiberalem, sed me in se neglegentem putabit,

    Cic. Fam. 13, 1, 16:

    neglegentior in patrem,

    Just. 32, 3, 1:

    in quem omnes intenderat curas,

    Curt. 3, 1, 21:

    quos ardere in proelia vidi,

    Verg. A. 2, 347:

    in bellum ardentes,

    Manil. 4, 220:

    nutante in fugam exercitu,

    Flor. 3, 10, 4:

    in hanc tam opimam mercedem agite ( = ut eam vobis paretis, Weissenb. ad loc.),

    Liv. 21, 43, 7:

    certa praemia, in quorum spem pugnarent,

    id. 21, 45, 4:

    in id sors dejecta,

    id. 21, 42, 2:

    in id fide accepta,

    id. 28, 17, 9:

    in spem pacis solutis animis,

    id. 6, 11, 5 et saep.:

    ingrata misero vita ducenda est in hoc, ut, etc.,

    Hor. Epod. 17, 63:

    nec in hoc adhibetur, ut, etc.,

    Sen. Ep. 16, 3:

    alius non in hoc, ut offenderet, facit, id. de Ira, 2, 26, 3: in quod tum missi?

    Just. 38, 3, 4.—So, like ad, with words expressing affections or inclination of the mind:

    in obsequium plus aequo pronus,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 10:

    paratus in res novas,

    Tac. H. 4, 32:

    in utrumque paratus,

    Verg. A. 2, 61.—
    3.
    Of the result of an act or effort:

    denique in familiae luctum atque in privignorum funus nupsit,

    Cic. Clu. 66, 188:

    paratusque miles, ut ordo agminis in aciem adsisteret,

    Tac. A. 2, 16: excisum Euboicae latus ingens rupis in antrum, Verg. A. 6, 42:

    portus ab Euroo fluctu curvatus in arcum,

    id. ib. 3, 533:

    populum in obsequia principum formavit,

    Just. 3, 2, 9:

    omnium partium decus in mercedem conruptum erat,

    Sall. H. 1, 13 Dietsch:

    commutari ex veris in falsa,

    Cic. Fat. 9, 17; 9, 18:

    in sollicitudinem versa fiducia est,

    Curt. 3, 8, 20.—
    4.
    Esp. in the phrase: in gratiam or in honorem, alicujus, in kindness, to show favor, out of good feeling, to show honor, etc., to any one (first in Liv.; cf. Weissenb. ad Liv. 28, 21, 4;

    Krebs, Antibarb. p. 562): in gratiam levium sociorum injuriam facere,

    Liv. 39, 26, 12:

    pugnaturi in gratiam ducis,

    id. 28, 21, 4:

    quorum in gratiam Saguntum deleverat Hannibal,

    id. 28, 39, 13; cf. id. 35, 2, 6; 26, 6, 16:

    oratio habita in sexus honorem,

    Quint. 1, 1, 6:

    convivium in honorem victoriae,

    id. 11, 2, 12:

    in honorem Quadratillae,

    Plin. Ep. 7, 24, 7:

    in honorem tuum,

    Sen. Ep. 20, 7; 79, 2; 92, 1; Vell. 2, 41 al.—
    5.
    In the phrase, in rem esse, to be useful, to avail (cf.: e re esse;

    opp.: contra rem esse): ut aequom est, quod in rem esse utrique arbitremur,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 10:

    si in rem est Bacchidis,

    Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 27; 2, 2, 7:

    hortatur, imperat, quae in rem sunt,

    Liv. 26, 44, 7:

    cetera, quae cognosse in rem erat,

    id. 22, 3, 2; 44, 19, 3:

    in rem fore credens universos adpellare,

    Sall. C. 20, 1; cf.:

    in duas res magnas id usui fore,

    Liv. 37, 15, 7:

    in hos usus,

    Verg. A. 4, 647.—
    6.
    To form adverbial expressions:

    non nominatim, qui Capuae, sed in universum qui usquam coissent, etc.,

    in general, Liv. 9, 26, 8; cf.:

    terra etsi aliquanto specie differt, in universum tamen aut silvis horrida aut paludibus foeda,

    Tac. G. 5:

    in universum aestimanti, etc.,

    id. ib. 6:

    aestate in totum, si fieri potest, abstinendum est (Venere),

    wholly, entirely, Cels. 1, 3 fin.; cf. Col. 2, 1, 2:

    in plenum dici potest, etc.,

    fully, Plin. 16, 40, 79, § 217:

    Marii virtutem in majus celebrare,

    beyond due bounds, Sall. J. 73, 5:

    aliter se corpus habere atque consuevit, neque in pejus tantum, sed etiam in melius,

    for the worse, for the better, Cels. 2, 2:

    in deterius,

    Tac. A. 14, 43:

    in mollius,

    id. ib. 14, 39:

    quid enim est iracundia in supervacuum tumultuante frigidius? Sen. de Ira, 2, 11: civitas saepta muris neque in barbarum corrupta (v. barbarus),

    Tac. A. 6, 42; cf.:

    aucto in barbarum cognomento,

    id. H. 5, 2:

    priusquam id sors cerneret, in incertum, ne quid gratia momenti faceret, in utramque provinciam decerni,

    while the matter was uncertain, Liv. 43, 12, 2:

    nec puer Iliaca quisquam de gente Latinos In tantum spe tollet avos,

    so much, Verg. A. 6, 876:

    in tantum suam felicitatem virtutemque enituisse,

    Liv. 22, 27, 4; cf.:

    quaedam (aquae) fervent in tantum, ut non possint esse usui,

    Sen. Q. N. 3, 24:

    viri in tantum boni, in quantum humana simplicitas intellegi potest,

    Vell. 2, 43, 4:

    quippe pedum digitos, in quantum quaeque secuta est, Traxit,

    Ov. M. 11, 71:

    meliore in omnia ingenio animoque quam fortuna usus,

    in all respects, Vell. 2, 13:

    ut simul in omnia paremur,

    Quint. 11, 3, 25:

    in antecessum dare,

    beforehand, Sen. Ep. 118.—
    7.
    Sometimes with esse, habere, etc., in is followed by the acc. (constr. pregn.), to indicate a direction, aim, purpose, etc. (but v. Madvig. Gram. § 230, obs. 2, note, who regards these accusatives as originating in errors of pronunciation); so, esse in potestatem alicujus, to come into and remain in one ' s power: esse in mentem alicui, to come into and be in one ' s mind: esse in conspectum, to appear to and be in sight: esse in usum, to come into use, be used, etc.:

    quod, qui illam partem urbis tenerent, in eorum potestatem portum futurum intellegebant,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 38:

    ut portus in potestatem Locrensium esset,

    Liv. 24, 1, 13; 2, 14, 4:

    eam optimam rem publicam esse duco, quae sit in potestatem optimorum,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 17:

    neque enim sunt motus in nostram potestatem,

    Quint. 6, 2, 29:

    numero mihi in mentem fuit,

    Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 25; cf.:

    ecquid in mentem est tibi?

    id. Bacch. 1, 2, 53:

    nec prius surrexisse ac militibus in conspectum fuisse, quam, etc.,

    Suet. Aug. 16:

    quod satis in usum fuit, sublato, ceterum omne incensum est,

    Liv. 22, 20, 6: ab hospitibus clientibusque suis, ab exteris nationibus, quae in amicitiam populi Romani dicionemque essent, injurias propulsare, Cic. Div. ap. Caecil. 20, 66: adesse in senatum [p. 914] jussit a. d. XIII. Kal. Octobr., id. Phil. 5, 7, 19.—Less freq. with habere: facito in memoriam habeas tuam majorem filiam mihi te despondisse, call or bring to mind, Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 108:

    M. Minucium magistrum equitum, ne quid rei bellicae gereret, prope in custodiam habitum,

    put in prison, kept in prison, Liv. 22, 25, 6:

    reliquos in custodiam habitos,

    Tac. H. 1, 87.—So rarely with other verbs:

    pollicetur se provinciam Galliam retenturum in senatus populique Romani potestatem,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 4, 8. —
    III.
    In composition, n regularly becomes assimilated to a foll. l, m, or r, and is changed before the labials into m: illabor, immitto, irrumpo, imbibo, impello.—As to its meaning, according as it is connected with a verb of rest or motion, it conveys the idea of existence in a place or thing, or of motion, direction, or inclination into or to a place or thing: inesse; inhibere, inferre, impellere, etc. See Hand, Turs. III. pp. 243- 356.
    2.
    in (before b and p, im; before l, m, and r, the n assimilates itself to these consonants), an inseparable particle [kindred with Sanscr. a-, an-; Gr. a-, an; Goth. and Germ. un-], which negatives the meaning of the noun or participle with which it is connected; Engl. un-, in-, not: impar, unequal: intolerabilis, unbearable, intolerable: immitis, not mild, rude, etc.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > in

  • 112 sisto

    sisto, stĭti (Charis. p. 220, and Diom. p. 369, give steti for both sisto and sto, confining stiti to the compounds of both. But steti, as perfect of sisto, is late jurid. Lat., and perh. dub.;

    for steterant,

    Verg. A. 3, 110;

    steterint,

    id. ib. 3, 403; Liv. 8, 32, 12, belong to stare; cf. also Gell. 2, 14, 1 sqq.; and v. Neue, Formenl. 2, 461 sq.), stătum [root stă, strengthened by reduplication; cf. histêmi], used in two general senses, I. To cause to stand, place, = colloco, pono; II. To stand, be placed, = sto.
    I.
    Sistere, in gen., = collocare (in class. prose only in the partic. uses, v. A. 4. C. and D., infra).
    A.
    Causative, with acc.
    1.
    To place = facere ut stet; constr. with in and abl., with abl. alone, and with ad, super, etc., and acc.:

    O qui me gelidis in vallibus Haemi Sistat,

    Verg. G. 2, 489:

    tertia lux classem Cretaeis sistet in oris,

    id. A. 3, 117 (classis stat;

    v. sto): inque tuo celerem litore siste gradum,

    Ov. H. 13, 102 (cf. infra, III. 2. A.):

    jaculum clamanti (al. clamantis) sistit in ore,

    plants the dart in his face, Verg. A. 10, 323:

    disponit quas in fronte manus, medio quas robore sistat,

    Stat. Th. 7, 393:

    (equum ligneum) sacratā sistimus arā,

    Verg. A. 2, 245:

    aeternis potius me pruinis siste,

    Stat. Th. 4, 395: ut stata (est) lux pelago, as soon as light was set ( shone) on the sea, id. ib. 5, 476:

    victima Sistitur ante aras,

    Ov. M. 15, 132:

    quam (suem) Aeneas ubi... sistit ad aram,

    Verg. A. 8, 85:

    post haec Sistitur crater,

    Ov. M. 8, 669: vestigia in altero (monte) sisti (non posse), that no footprints can be placed ( made) on the other mountain, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211:

    cohortes expeditas super caput hostium sistit,

    Tac. H. 3, 77; cf. id. A. 12, 13; Stat. Th. 4, 445; Sil. 4, 612. —
    2.
    To place, as the result of guidance or conveyance; hence, to convey, to send, lead, take, conduct to, = facere ut veniat; constr. with in and abl., with abl. alone, and with advv. of place: officio meo ripā sistetur in illā Haec, will be carried by me to, etc., Ov. M. 9, 109:

    terrā sistēre petitā,

    id. ib. 3, 635:

    (vos) facili jam tramite sistam,

    Verg. A. 6, 676:

    ut eum in Syriā aut Aegypto sisterent orabat,

    to convey him to, Tac. H. 2, 9.—So with hic (= in with abl.) or huc (= in with acc.):

    hic siste patrem,

    Sen. Phoen. 121:

    Annam huc siste sororem,

    Verg. A. 4, 634.—
    3.
    To place an army in order of battle, draw up, = instruere:

    aciem in litore sistit,

    Verg. A. 10, 309; cf.:

    sistere tertiam decimam legionem in ipso aggere jubet,

    Tac. H. 3, 21.—
    4.
    Se sistere = to betake one's self, to present one's self, to come (so twice in Cicero's letters):

    des operam, id quod mihi affirmasti, ut te ante Kal. Jan., ubicumque erimus, sistas,

    Cic. Att. 3, 25:

    te vegetum nobis in Graeciā sistas,

    id. ib. 10, 16, 6 (cf. infra, E.):

    hic dea se primum rapido pulcherrima nisu Sistit,

    Verg. A. 11, 853.—
    5.
    With two acc. (cf.: praesto, reddo) = to cause to be in a certain condition, to place, etc.; often with dat. of interest (ante- and post-class., and poet.; cf.

    supra, 4.): ego vos salvos sistam,

    I will place you in safety, see you to a safe place, Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 5:

    omnia salva sistentur tibi,

    all will be returned to you in good order, id. ib. 5, 3, 3; so,

    suam rem sibi salvam sistam,

    id. Poen. 5, 2, 123; cf.:

    rectius tacitas tibi res sistam, quam quod dictum est mutae mulieri,

    will keep your secrets, id. ib. 4, 2, 54:

    neque (dotem) incolumem sistere illi, et detraxe autument,

    that you deliver it entire to her, id. Trin. 3, 3, 15:

    cum te reducem aetas prospera sistet,

    Cat. 64, 238: tu modo servitio vacuum me siste (= praesta) superbo, set me free from, Prop. 4, 16 (3, 17), 42:

    tutum patrio te limine sistam,

    will see you safe home, Verg. A. 2, 620:

    praedā onustos triumphantesque mecum domos reduces sistatis,

    Liv. 29, 27, 3 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    Pelasgis siste levem campum,

    Stat. Th. 8, 328:

    modo se isdem in terris victorem sisterent,

    Tac. A. 2, 14:

    operā tuā sistas hunc nobis sanum atque validum,

    give him back to us, safe and sound, Gell. 18, 10, 7: ita mihi salvam ac sospitem rempublicam sistere in suā sede liceat, Aug. ap. Suet. Aug. 28.—
    b.
    Neutr, with double nom., = exsistere, to be, to become: judex extremae sistet vitaeque necisque, he will become a judge, etc., Manil. 4, 548 (dub.):

    tempora quod sistant propriis parentia signis,

    id. 3, 529 (dub.; al. sic stant; cf. infra, II.).—
    B.
    As neuter verb, to stand, rest, be placed, lie ( poet.);

    constr. like sto: ne quis mihi obstiterit obviam, nam qui obstiterit, ore sistet,

    will lie on his face, Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 13 Brix ad loc.: (nemo sit) tantā gloriā... quin cadat, quin capite sistat, will be placed or stand on his head, id. Curc. 2, 3, 8:

    ibi crebro, credo, capite sistebant cadi,

    id. Mil. 3, 2, 36 Lorenz (Brix, hoc illi crebro capite):

    ipsum si quicquam posse in se sistere credis,

    to rest upon itself, Lucr. 1, 1057:

    neque posse in terrā sistere terram,

    nor can the earth rest upon itself, id. 2, 603:

    at conlectus aquae... qui lapides inter sistit per strata viarum,

    id. 4, 415:

    incerti quo fata ferant, ubi sistere detur,

    to rest, to stay, Verg. A. 3, 7; cf.:

    quaesitisque diu terris, ubi sistere detur,

    Ov. M. 1, 307. —
    C.
    As jurid. term.
    1.
    In both a causative and neuter sense = to produce in court, or to appear in court after being bound over by the judge or by promise to the adversary (vadimonium); constr. either absol. or with the dat. of the adversary to whom the promise is made (alicui sisti), to appear upon somebody's demand; also, in judicio sisti. The present active is either used reflexively (se sistere = to appear), or with a transitive object (sistere aliquem = to produce in court one in whose behalf the promise has been made). The present passive, sisti, sistendus, sistitur, = to appear or to be produced. The perfect act., stiti, stitisse, rarely the perfect passive, status sum, = to have appeared, I appeared. So in all periods of the language:

    cum autem in jus vocatus fuerit adversarius, ni eo die finitum fuerit negotium, vadimonium ei faciendum est, id est ut promittat se certo die sisti,

    Gai. 4, 184:

    fit ut Alfenus promittat, Naevio sisti Quinctium,

    that Quinctius would be forthcoming upon Naevius's complaint, Cic. Quint. 21, 67; cf. id. ib. 8, 30 (v. infra, B.):

    testificatur, P. Quinctium non stitisse, et se stitisse,

    id. ib. 6, 25:

    quin puellam sistendam promittat (= fore ut puella sistatur in judicio),

    Liv. 3, 45, 3:

    interrogavit quisquam, in quem diem locumque vadimonium promitti juberet, et Scipio manum ad ipsam oppidi, quod obsidebatur, arcem protendens: Perendie sese sistant illo in loco,

    Gell. 7, 1, 10:

    si quis quendam in judicio sisti promiserit, in eādem causā eum debet sistere,

    Dig. 2, 11, 11:

    si servum in eādem causā sistere promiserit, et liber factus sistatur,... non recte sistitur,

    ib. 2, 9, 5:

    sed si statu liberum sisti promissum sit, in eādem causā sisti videtur, quamvis liber sistatur,

    ib. 2, 9, 6:

    cum quis in judicio sisti promiserit, neque adjecerit poenam si status non esset,

    ib. 2, 6, 4:

    si quis in judicio secundum suam promissionem non stitit,

    ib. 2, 11, 2, § 1; cf. ib. 2, 5, 1; 2, 8, 2; 2, 11, 2, § 3.—
    2.
    Vadimonium sistere, to present one's self in court, thus keeping the solemn engagement (vadimonium) made to that effect; lit., to make the vadimonium stand, i. e. effective, opp. deserere vadimonium = not to appear, to forfeit the vadimonium. The phrase does not occur in the jurists of the Pandects, the institution of the vadimonium being abolished by Marcus Aurelius. It is found in the following three places only: quid si vadimonium capite obvoluto stitisses? Cat. ap. Gell. 2, 14, 1: ut Quinctium sisti Alfenus promitteret. Venit Romam Quinctius;

    vadimonium sistit,

    Cic. Quint. 8, 30:

    ut nullum illa stiterit vadimonium sine Attico,

    Nep. Att. 9; Gai. 4, 185; cf. diem sistere under status, P. a. infra.—
    D.
    Transf., out of judicial usage, in gen., = to appear or present one's self, quasi ex vadimonio; constr. absol. or with dat. of the person entitled to demand the appearance:

    ubi tu es qui me vadatus's Veneriis vadimoniis? Sisto ego tibi me, et mihi contra itidem ted ut sistas suadeo (of a lover's appointment),

    Plaut. Curc. 1, 3, 5; so,

    tibi amatorem illum alacrem vadimonio sistam,

    produce, App. M. 9, p. 227, 14:

    nam promisimus carnufici aut talentum magnum, aut hunc hodie sistere,

    Plaut. Rud. 3, 4, 73:

    vas factus est alter ejus sistendi, ut si ille non revertisset, moriendum esset sibi,

    Cic. Off. 3, 10, 45. —
    E.
    Fana sistere, acc. to Festus anciently used, either = to place ( secure and fix places for) temples in founding a city, or to place the couches in the lectisternia:

    sistere fana, cum in urbe condendā dicitur, significat loca in oppido futurorum fanorum constituere: quamquam Antistius Labeo, in commentario XV. juris pontificii ait fana sistere esse lectisternia certis locis et diebus habere,

    Fest. p. 267 Lind. To this usage Plaut. perh. alludes:

    apud illas aedis sistendae mihi sunt sycophantiae,

    the place about that house I must make the scene of my tricks, Plaut. Trin. 4, 2, 25.—
    F.
    Sistere monumenta, etc., or sistere alone, to erect statues, etc. (= statuere; post-class. and rare;

    mostly in Tac.): ut apud Palatium effigies eorum sisteret,

    Tac. A. 15, 72:

    cum Augustus sibi templum sisti non prohibuisset,

    id. ib. 4 37:

    at Romae tropaea de Parthis arcusque sistebantur,

    id. ib. 15, 18:

    monuere ut... templum iisdem vestigiis sisteretur,

    id. H. 4, 53:

    sistere monumenta,

    Aus. Ep. 24, 55: Ast ego te... Carthaginis arce Marmoreis sistam templis (cf. histanai tina), Sil. 8, 231; v. statuo.
    II.
    Sistere = to cause what is tottering or loose to stand firm, to support or fasten; and neutr., to stand firm.
    A.
    Causative (rare;

    perh. not in class. prose) = stabilire: sucus... mobilis (dentes) sistit,

    Plin. 20, 3, 8, § 15; and trop.: hic (Marcellus) rem Romanam magno turbante tumultu Sistet (cf.: respublica stat;

    v. sto),

    Verg. A. 6, 858; cf.:

    non ita civitatem aegram esse, ut consuetis remediis sisti posset,

    Liv. 3, 20, 8 (where sisti may be impers.; v. infra, III. C.).—
    B.
    Neutr., to stand firm, to last, = stare:

    nec mortale genus, nec divum corpora sancta Exiguom possent horai sistere tempus,

    Lucr. 1, 1016: qui rem publicam sistere negat posse, nisi ad equestrem ordinem judicia referantur, Cotta ap. Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 96, § 223.—
    2.
    Neutr., to stand firm, to resist:

    nec quicquam Teucros Sustentare valet telis, aut sistere contra,

    Verg. A. 11, 873; so with dat. = resistere:

    donec Galba, inruenti turbae neque aetate neque corpore sistens, sella levaretur,

    Tac. H. 1, 35; cf. sisti = resistere, III. B. 1. f. infra.
    III.
    Sistere = to stand still, and to cause to stand still.
    A.
    Neutr. = stare (rare; in Varr., Tac., and the poets).
    a.
    To stand still:

    solstitium dictum est quod sol eo die sistere videatur,

    Varr. L. L. 5, p. 53 (Bip.):

    sistunt amnes,

    Verg. G. 1, 479:

    incurrit, errat, sistit,

    Sen. Herc. Oet. 248.—
    b.
    To remain, stop:

    Siste! Quo praeceps ruis?

    Sen. Thyest. 77; id. Oedip. 1050:

    vis tu quidem istum intra locum sistere?

    will you remain in that position? Tac. A. 4, 40.—
    c.
    Trop., to stop, not to go any farther:

    depunge, ubi sistam,

    Pers. 6, 79:

    nec in Hectore tracto sistere,

    to stop at the dragging of Hector, Stat. Achill. 1, 7.—
    d.
    To cease (dub.):

    hactenus sistat nefas' pius est,

    if his crime ceases here, he will be pious, Sen. Thyest. 744 (perh. act., to stop, end).—
    B.
    Causative (not ante-Aug.; freq. in Tac., Plin., and the poets).
    1.
    To arrest, stop, check an advancing motion.
    a.
    With gradum:

    plano sistit uterque gradum,

    arrest their steps, Prop. 5 (4), 10, 36; Verg. A. 6, 465:

    siste properantem gradum,

    Sen. Herc. Fur. 772:

    repente sistunt gradum,

    Curt. 4, 6, 14. —With pedem, Ov. R. Am. 80.—
    b.
    With fugam, to stop, stay, check, stem, arrest the flight:

    fugam foedam siste,

    Liv. 1, 12, 5:

    si periculo suo fugam sistere posset,

    id. 30, 12, 1; so Curt. 8, 14, 37; 4, 16, 2; 8, 3, 2; Tac. A. 12, 39.—
    c.
    Of vehicles, horses, etc.:

    esseda siste,

    Prop. 2, 1, 76:

    equos,

    Verg. A. 12, 355:

    quadrijugos,

    Stat. Achill. 2, 429; so id. Th. 5, 364.—
    d.
    With iter, to arrest the advance of an army, to halt:

    exercitus iter sistit,

    Tac. H. 3, 50.—
    e.
    With bellum, to halt (cf. infra, D.):

    Aquilejae sisti bellum expectarique Mucianum jubebat,

    Tac. H. 3, [p. 1712] 8.—
    f.
    Of living objects, in gen.
    (α).
    To arrest their course, make them halt:

    aegre coercitam legionem Bedriaci sistit,

    Tac. H. 2, 23:

    festinantia sistens Fata,

    staying the hurrying Fates, Stat. S. 3, 4, 24.—So, se sistere with ab, to desist from:

    non prius se ab effuso cursu sistunt,

    Liv. 6, 29, 3; hence, to arrest by wounding, i. e. to wound or kill:

    aliquem cuspide,

    Sil. 1, 382; 1, 163; so,

    cervum vulnere sistere,

    id. 2, 78.—
    (β).
    To stop a hostile attack of persons, to resist them, ward them off:

    ut non sisterent modo Sabinas legiones, sed in fugam averterent,

    Liv. 1, 37, 3:

    ibi integrae vires sistunt invehentem se jam Samnitem,

    id. 10, 14, 18:

    nec sisti vis hostium poterat,

    Curt. 5, 3, 11:

    nec sisti poterant scandentes,

    Tac. H. 3, 71; 5, 21. —
    g.
    Trop., to stop the advance of prices:

    pretia augeri in dies, nec mediocribus remediis sisti posse,

    Tac. A. 3, 52.—
    2. a.
    Of water:

    sistere aquam fluviis,

    Verg. A. 4, 489:

    amnis, siste parumper aquas,

    Ov. Am. 3, 6, 2:

    quae concita flumina sistunt,

    id. M. 7, 154:

    sistito infestum mare,

    calm, Sen. Agam. 523; cf. Ov. M. 7, 200; id. H. 6, 87; Plin. 28, 8, 29, § 118.—
    b.
    Of blood and secretions:

    (ea) quibus sistitur sanguis parari jubet,

    Tac. A. 15, 54:

    sanguinem,

    Plin. 20, 7, 25, § 59; 28, 18, 73, § 239; 27, 4, 5, § 18:

    haemorrhoidum abundantiam,

    id. 27, 4, 5, § 19:

    fluctiones,

    id. 20, 8, 27, § 71, 34, 10, 23, § 105; 35, 17, 57, § 195:

    nomas,

    id. 30, 13, 39, § 116; 24, 16, 94, § 151:

    mensis,

    id. 23, 6, 60, § 112:

    vomitiones,

    id. 20, 20, 81, § 213:

    alvum bubus,

    id. 18, 16, 42, § 143:

    alvum,

    stop the bowels, id. 23, 6, 60, § 113; 22, 25, 59, § 126; 20, 5, 18, § 37:

    ventrem,

    id. 20, 23, 96, § 256; Mart. 13, 116.—
    3.
    To arrest the motion of life, make rigid:

    ille oculos sistit,

    Stat. Th. 2, 539.—
    4.
    To end, put an end to (= finem facere alicui rei); pass., to cease:

    querelas,

    Ov. M. 7, 711:

    fletus,

    id. ib. 14, 835:

    lacrimas,

    id. F. 1, 367; 480; 6, 154:

    minas,

    id. Tr. 1, 2, 60:

    opus,

    id. H. 16 (17), 266; id. M. 3, 153:

    labores,

    id. ib. 5, 490:

    furorem,

    Stat. Th. 5, 663:

    furialem impetum,

    Sen. Med. 157; id. Agam. 203:

    pace tamen sisti bellum placet,

    Ov. M. 14, 803:

    antequam summa dies spectacula sistat,

    id. F. 4, 387:

    sitim sistere,

    to allay, id. P. 3, 1, 18:

    nec primo in limine sistit conatus scelerum,

    suppresses, Stat. S. 5, 2, 86:

    ruinas,

    to stop destruction, Plin. Pan. 50, 4:

    ventum,

    to ward off, turn the wind, id. Ep. 2, 17, 17;

    (motus terrae) non ante quadraginta dies sistuntur, = desinunt,

    Plin. 2, 82, 84, § 198.—
    5.
    Sistere with intra = to confine, keep within:

    transgresso jam Alpes Caecina, quem sisti intra Gallias posse speraverant,

    Tac. H. 2, 11:

    dum populatio lucem intra sisteretur,

    provided the raids were confined to day-time, id. A. 4, 48. —
    C.
    Impers. and trop., to arrest or avoid an impending misfortune, or to stand, i. e. to endure; generally in the form sisti non potest (more rarely: sisti potest) = it cannot be endured, a disaster cannot be avoided or met (once in Plaut.; freq. in Liv.; sometimes in Tac.; cf., in gen., Brix ad Plaut. Trin. 720; Drak. ad Liv. 3, 16, 4; Weissenb. ad Liv. 2, 29, 8; Gronov. ad Liv. 4, 12, 6; Beneke ad Just. 11, 1, 6).
    1.
    Without a subject, res or a noun of general import being understood:

    quid ego nunc agam, nisi ut clipeum ad dorsum accommodem, etc.? Non sisti potest,

    it is intolerable, Plaut. Trin. 3, 2, 94:

    totam plebem aere alieno demersam esse, nec sisti posse nisi omnibus consulatur,

    Liv. 2, 29, 8:

    si domestica seditio adiciatur, sisti non posse,

    the situation will be desperate, id. 45, 19, 3:

    si quem similem priore anno dedissent, non potuisse sisti,

    id. 3, 9, 8:

    vixque concordiā sisti videbatur,

    that the crisis could scarcely be met, even by harmonious action, id. 3, 16, 4:

    qualicunque urbis statu, manente disciplinā militari sisti potuisse,

    these evils were endurable, id. 2, 44, 10: exercitum gravi morbo affectari, nec sisti potuisse ni, etc., it would have ended in disaster, if not, etc., id. 29, 10, 1:

    qui omnes populi si pariter deficiant, sisti nullo modo posse,

    Just. 11, 1, 6 Gronov. ad loc.; cf. Liv. 3, 20, 8 supra, II. A. 1.— Rarely with a subject-clause understood: nec jam sisti poterat, and it was no longer tolerable, i. e. that Nero should disgrace himself, etc., Tac. A. 14, 14.—
    2.
    Rarely with quin, to prevent etc. (pregn., implying also the stopping of something; cf.

    supra, III. B. 1.): neque sisti potuit quin et palatium et domus et cuncta circum haurirentur (igni),

    Tac. A. 15, 39.—Hence, stătus, a, um, P. a., as attribute of nouns, occurs in several conventional phrases, as relics of archaic usage.
    A.
    Status (condictusve) dies cum hoste, in the XII. Tables, = a day of trial fixed by the judge or agreed upon with the adversary;

    esp., a peregrinus (= hostis),

    Cic. Off. 1, 12, 37. It presupposes a phrase, diem sistere, prob.=vadimonium sistere (v. supra, I. C. 2.). Such an appointment was an excuse from the most important public duties, even for soldiers from joining the army, Cinc. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 4.—

    Hence, transf.: si status condictus cum hoste intercedit dies, tamen est eundum quo imperant,

    i. e. under all circumstances we must go, Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 5.—
    B.
    In certain phrases, appointed, fixed, regular (cf. statutus, with which it is often confounded in MSS.):

    status dies: tres in anno statos dies habere quibus, etc.,

    Liv. 39, 13, 8:

    stato loco statisque diebus,

    id. 42, 32, 2; so id. 5, 52, 2; 27, 23 fin.:

    stato lustri die,

    Sen. Troad. 781:

    status sacrificii dies,

    Flor. 1, 3, 16:

    statum tempus, statā vice, etc.: lunae defectio statis temporibus fit,

    Liv. 44, 37 init.; so id. 28, 6, 10:

    stato tempore,

    Tac. A. 12, 13; id. H. 4, 81; Plin. 11, 37, 65, § 173:

    stata tempora (partus),

    Stat. Achill. 2, 673:

    adeo in illā plagā mundus statas vices temporum mutat,

    Curt. 8, 19, 13; so id. 9, 9, 9; 5, 1, 23; so, feriae, etc.: feriae statae appellabantur quod certo statutoque die observarentur, Paul. ex Fest. p. 69 Lind.:

    stata quinquennia,

    Stat. S. 5, 3, 113:

    stata sacra or sacrificia: stata sacrificia sunt quae certis diebus fieri debent,

    Fest. p. 264 Lind.:

    proficiscuntur Aeniam ad statum sacrificium,

    Liv. 40, 4, 9; 23, 35, 3; 5, 46, 2; 39, 13, 8; Cic. Mil. 17, 45:

    solemne et statum sacrificium (al. statutum),

    id. Tusc. 1, 47, 113; so Liv. 23, 35, 3:

    stata sacra,

    Ov. F. 2, 528; Stat. Th. 1, 666:

    stata foedera,

    id. ib. 11, 380:

    status flatus,

    Sen. Ben. 4, 28:

    stati cursus siderum,

    Plin. 18, 29, 69, § 291 (different: statae stellae = fixed stars, Censor. D. N. 8, belonging to II. 2. supra): statae febres, intermittent fevers, returning regularly, Plin. 28, 27, 28, § 107.—
    C.
    Moderate, average, normal:

    inter enim pulcherrimam feminam et deformissimam media forma quaedam est, quae et a nimio pulcritudinis periculo et a summo deformitatis odio vacat, qualis a Q. Ennio perquam eleganti vocabulo stata dicitur...Ennius autem eas fere feminas ait incolumi pudicitia esse quae statā formā forent,

    Gell. 5, 11, 12 -14 (v. Enn. Trag. p. 133 Vahl.).

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > sisto

  • 113 ἄν

    ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,
    A

    εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2

    , 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.
    A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.
    I WITH INDICATIVE:
    1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,
    a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh.

    καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4

    . 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said,

    εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c;

    εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3

    .
    c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.
    d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.
    2 with [tense] fut. ind.:
    a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176;

    ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80

    ; so in Lyr.,

    μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68

    , cf. I.6(5).59.
    b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers,

    σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140

    ;

    οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d

    , cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313;

    οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36

    (corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.
    II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future,

    οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54

    , al.
    III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):
    a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition:

    ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    ;

    οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b

    :—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.
    b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e;

    ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116

    , cf. D.1.26, al.
    c with protasis understood:

    φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269

    ; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447;

    οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240

    , cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time,

    Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85

    .
    d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.
    e in questions, expressing a wish:

    τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100

    , cf.A.Ag. 1448;

    πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389

    : hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty,

    τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94

    ; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.
    f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.
    g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis:

    ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231

    , cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag.,

    θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186

    ;

    τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605

    .
    h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.
    IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part.,

    τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b

    ) representing ind. or opt.:
    1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.
    2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.
    b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.
    3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:
    a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.
    b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.
    4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional,

    ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c

    (codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk.,

    νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8

    , cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.
    I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once

    εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288

    , twice

    εἴπερ ἄν 5.224

    , 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.
    2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε (

    ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412

    ), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.
    3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep.,

    σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32

    ;

    ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e

    ;

    μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a

    (where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc.

    ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156

    ( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.
    II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc.

    εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597

    ),

    εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353

    ; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in

    ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81

    .
    2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15;

    ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6

    :—similarly after a preceding opt.,

    οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d

    .
    III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:
    1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.:

    αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213

    :—so with relat.,

    οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175

    .
    2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom.,

    εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526

    ; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.
    IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as

    ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56

    ;

    ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136

    (iv A. D.);

    ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19

    ; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.
    C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119;

    εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295

    ; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71;

    διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b

    : inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.
    D GENERAL REMARKS:
    I POSITION OF ἄν.
    1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as

    εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281

    -4; rarely by τις, as

    ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14

    :—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as

    εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355

    , cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose,

    ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45

    ;

    ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420

    : also

    ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e

    , cf. 850a;

    ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c

    .
    2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.
    3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25;

    οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2

    ; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48;

    οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b

    ;

    οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12

    .
    4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause,

    ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax

    <*>37.
    II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words,

    ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333

    , cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15;

    ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244

    , cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.
    2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.
    III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι)

    , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935

    :—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν)

    εἰ.. Isoc.10.48

    :—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.
    IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others:

    πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049

    : even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,
    A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl.,

    ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b

    ; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50;

    ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4

    : not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν

  • 114

    , [full] , τό, is, when thus written,
    A demonstr. Pronoun.
    B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.
    C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., , , οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but , , οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual

    τοῖιν Od.18.34

    , al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;

    οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404

    (anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;

    τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18

    ;

    τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e

    ;

    τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e

    ;

    τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75

    (τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,

    ταῖν Lys.19.17

    , Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem.,

    μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8

    (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. , ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With , ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)
    A , , τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):
    I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,

    αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105

    ;

    τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186

    , cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.
    II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,

    ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12

    , al.
    III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;

    θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43

    , cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.
    IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.
    V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.
    VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,

    ὁ δέ

    the former,

    Pl.Prt. 359e

    , Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,

    ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595

    ;

    τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d

    , etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,

    ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28

    , cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;

    πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c

    ; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,

    ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6

    : sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or

    ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317

    -19, cf. 116 ;

    τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.
    2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g.

    τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24

    ;

    τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b

    ;

    οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a

    , etc.
    3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which refers is left indefinite,

    ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41

    ;

    νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c

    , cf. Phlb. 13c.
    4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.
    5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding

    ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3

    , cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by

    ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304

    ; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;

    τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843

    , etc. ;

    ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205

    (v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf.

    μέν D.

    III ;

    γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d

    , cf. Tht. 181d.
    6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,

    τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491

    ;

    τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3

    , cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87

    ;

    ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6

    : this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.
    7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.
    VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,
    1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.

    ὅς A.

    II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,

    καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,

    καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61

    , al.
    2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,

    τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b

    : but mostly in acc.,

    καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;

    τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141

    , cf. 9.68 ;

    τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243

    ; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad,

    τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398

    , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;

    τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53

    ; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.
    VIII abs. usages of single cases,
    1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,

    τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12

    .
    b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;

    τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46

    ;

    δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210

    :—only poet.
    c of Manner,

    τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν

    in this way, thus,

    Od.8.510

    .
    d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without

    μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48

    .
    e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.
    2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,

    τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d

    , Sph. 230b.
    b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.
    3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),

    τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37

    ;

    τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89

    ; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.
    4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also

    τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14

    ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14

    ;

    τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90

    : sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,

    τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107

    ,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.
    5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.
    b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32

    , cf. A.Eu. 462 ;

    τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59

    .
    6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,

    ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90

    , Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;

    ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71

    ;

    τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c

    : in late Prose, also with Positives,

    ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47

    codd.; with

    πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19

    , cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).
    B , , τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,

    αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον

    the hindmost man,

    Il.11.178

    ;

    τὸν ἄριστον 17.80

    ;

    τὸν δύστηνον 22.59

    ;

    τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325

    ; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in

    τῶν ἄλλων 2.674

    , al.: with Advs.,

    τὸ πρίν 24.543

    , al.;

    τὸ πάρος περ 17.720

    ;

    τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583

    ; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;

    τὰ πρῶτα 1.6

    ,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;

    ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559

    .—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.
    I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,

    τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5

    ; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12;

    οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b

    .
    b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).
    c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.
    d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.
    2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,

    οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109

    ;

    πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242

    , etc.
    b freq. with abstract Nouns,

    ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45

    , etc.
    3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.
    4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.
    5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;

    τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148

    ; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.
    6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;

    τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b

    ;

    ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d

    , cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;

    ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8

    ;

    τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8

    : hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.
    7 before Prons.,
    a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc.,

    τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a

    ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ;

    τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a

    ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.
    b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.
    c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,

    ὁ τοιοῦτος

    that sort of person,

    X.Mem.4.2.21

    , etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,

    τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13

    .
    8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    πολύς 11.3

    , etc.
    9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.
    II elliptic expressions:
    1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.
    2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,

    τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48

    . But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as

    τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86

    ; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.
    3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.
    4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.
    5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as , , τὸ νῦν;

    ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52

    ; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as

    κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266

    , cf.[315] (lyr.);

    ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412

    (lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;

    τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731

    .
    C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as

    κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262

    , cf. 1.300, al. ;

    Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526

    (lyr.);

    Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86

    ; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,

    ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3

    , cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag.,

    τῆς S.OC 1258

    , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);

    τῷ S.Ph.14

    ;

    τήν Id.OC 747

    , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.

    τεῦ Il.18.192

    (s.v.l.).
    D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:
    a [dialect] Att. , , τό, with [pron. full] make , as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: , τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: , τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: , τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.
    b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from

    ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65

    , ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from

    ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60

    , etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) >

  • 115 γίνομαι

    γίνομαι (in the form γίγνομαι [s. below] Hom.+; as γίν. since Aristot.+; and s. Kühner-Bl. II p. 391; Schwyzer I 215; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 126; Mayser p. 165 and lit. there). Impf. ἐγινόμην; fut. γενήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην, 3 sg. opt. γένοιτο; very rare v.l. (B-D-F §81, 3) γενάμενος (GJs 6:1; 16;1; 25:1 [s. deStrycker 249]; also found in Ps.-Callisth. 1, 20, 1; 1, 41, 11; ApcEsdr 1:3 p. 24, 7 Tdf.; Mel., P. 49, 346 [Bodm.]). Pass.: fut. ptc. τῶν γενηθησομένων (Eccl 1:11 v.l.); 1 aor. ἐγενήθην (Doric, H. Gk.; Phryn. 108 Lob.; pap fr. III B.C., Mayser I/22 ’38, 157f [w. lit.]; ins [Schweizer 181; Nachmanson 168; Thieme 13]; LXX), impv. γενηθήτω; pf. γεγένημαι (Meisterhans3-Schw.: Att. ins since 376 B.C.; Mayser 391) uncontested use in NT only J 2:9; GJs 24:3 (γεγένν-pap); apolog. On pf. γέγονα s. Meisterhans3-Schw.: since 464 B.C.; Mayser 372; on the aoristic use of γέγονα s. Mlt. 145f; 238; 239; PChantraine, Histoire du parfait grec 1927, 233–45; 3 pl. γέγοναν Ro 16:7 (v.l. γεγόνασιν) and Rv 21:6; s. KBuresch, Γέγοναν: RhM 46, 1891, 193ff; Mlt. 52 n.; ptc. γεγονώς; plpf. 3 sg. ἐγεγόνει (1 Macc. 4:27; 2 Macc. 13:17; J 6:17; Just.), without augment γεγόνει (Ac 4:22; v.l. ἐγεγόνει), s. B-D-F §78; Mlt-H. 190. On the variation γίνομαι and γίγνομαι s. W-S. §5, 31; B-D-F §34, 4; Mlt-H. 108. A verb with numerous nuances relating to being and manner of being. Its contrast to the more static term εἰμί can be seen in Kaibel 595, 5 οὐκ ἤμην καὶ ἐγενόμην=I was not and then I came to be (cp. Ath. 4, 2 in 3 below).
    to come into being through process of birth or natural production, be born, be produced (SIG 1168, 6; Epict. 2, 17, 8; Wsd 7:3; Sir 44:9; Just., A I, 13, 3; Tat. 26, 2) J 8:58; w. ἔκ τινος foll. (Diod S 3, 64, 1; Appian, Basil. 5 §1; Parthenius 1, 4; Athen. 13, 37 p. 576c ἐξ ἑταίρας; PPetr III, 2, 20; PFlor 382, 38 ὁ ἐξ ἐμοῦ γενόμενος υἱός; 1 Esdr 4:16; Tob 8:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 216) Ro 1:3; Gal 4:4 (cp. 1QS 11:21). Also of plants 1 Cor 15:37. Of fruits ἔκ τινος be produced by a tree Mt 21:19 (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 13 ὁ ἐκ τ. χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος). W. ἀπό τινος foll. Ox 1081 (SJCh), 11 γε̣[ινόμε]νον, 14 γέγ[ονος], 14f γε[ι]νομεν[ον], 19 γέγονος.
    to come into existence, be made, be created, be manufactured, be performed
    gener. ὸ̔ γέγονεν J 1:3c (s. ref. to Vawter, below); w. διά τινος vs. 3a (MTeschendorf, D. Schöpfungsged. im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 337–72). W. χωρίς τινος vs. 3b (IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 15 [103 A.D.] Ἐμοῦ δὲ χωρὶς γείνετʼ οὐδὲν πώποτε; Cleanthes, Hymn to Zeus 15 [Stoic. I 537=Coll. Alex. no. 1 p. 227] οὐδέ τι γίγνεται ἔργον σοῦ δίχα; note the related style 1QH 1:20; on the syntax of J 1:3f see BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6, who favors a full stop after οὐδὲ ἕν, s. εἷς 2b and lit. cited there on J 1:3). W. ἔκ τινος Hb 11:3. Of cult images διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι made w. hands Ac 19:26 (cp. PRyl 231, 3 [40 A.D.] τοὺς ἄρτους γενέσθαι). Of miracles: be done, take place (Tob 11:15; Wsd 19:13 v.l. Swete) Mt 11:20f, 23; Lk 10:13; Ac 8:13. ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο on whom this miracle had been performed 4:22. W. mention of the author διά τινος (cp. 4 Macc 17:11) 2:43; 4:16, 30; 12:9; 24:2. διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Mk 6:2; Ac 14:3. ὑπό τινος (Herodian 8, 4, 2; OGI 168, 46 [115 B.C.] τὰ γεγονότα ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλάνθρωπα; UPZ III, 3, 7 [116 B.C.]; PTebt 786, 14 [II B.C.]; Wsd 9:2; Jos., Ant. 8, 111; 347; Just., D. 35, 8 τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ [Jesus] καὶ νῦν γινομένων δυνάμεων) Lk 9:7 v.l.; 13:17; 23:8; Eph 5:12. Of commands, instructions be fulfilled, performed γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου thy will be done (Appian, Liby. 90 §423 τὸ πρόσταγμα δεῖ γενέσθαι; Syntipas p. 25, 3 γενέσθω τὸ αἴτημα) Mt 6:10; 26:42; Lk 11:2; cp. 22:42. γέγονεν ὸ̔ ἐπέταξας your order has been carried out 14:22. γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν that their demand should be granted 23:24. Of institutions: be established, the Sabbath for the sake of humans Mk 2:27 (Crates, Ep. 24 οὐ γεγόνασιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τ. ἵππων χάριν, ἀλλʼ οἱ ἵπποι τ. ἀνθρώπων).
    w. mention of the special nature of an undertaking: ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί in order to have such action taken in my case 1 Cor 9:15. ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ τί γένηται; what will be done when it (the wood) is dry? Lk 23:31.
    come into being as an event or phenomenon from a point of origin, arise, come about, develop (Alcaeus 23 Diehl2 [320 L-P.] καί κʼ οὐδὲν ἐκ δένος γένοιτο=nothing could originate from nothing; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὸ̓ν)
    of events or phenomena in nature (Sir 40:10; Ex 10:22; Job 40:23; Jos., Ant. 9, 36): lightning, thunder (X., An. 3, 1, 11) J 12:29; Rv 8:5; 11:19; calm (on the sea) Mt 8:26; Mk 4:39; Lk 8:24; storm Mk 4:37; a cloud (cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 36) 9:7; Lk 9:34; Hv 4, 3, 7; flood Lk 6:48; earthquake (Parian Marbles [III B.C.]=FGrH: 239B, 24) Mt 8:24; 28:2; Ac 16:26; Rv 6:12; 11:13; 16:18; darkness Mt 27:45; Mk 15:33; Lk 23:44; J 6:17; hail, fire Rv 8:7. Of a dawning day ὅτε δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο (cp. περὶ ἀρχομένην ἡμέραν ‘about dawn’ Jos., Vi 15: in a related story of shipwreck) Ac 27:39.
    of other occurrences (Arrian, Anab. 4, 4, 3 τὰ ἱερὰ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο=the sacrifice did not turn out [favorably]; 1 Macc 1:25; 4:58; 9:27; 13:44; Jdth 7:29; 14:19 al.): complaining Ac 6:1; persecution, oppression Mt 13:21; 24:21; Mk 4:17; 13:19; Ac 11:19; discussion J 3:25; Ac 15:7; tumult Mt 26:5; 27:24; GJs 21:1 and 25:1; a sound Ac 2:2, 6; weeping 20:37; clamor 23:9; Mt 25:6; AcPl Ha 4, 6; famine Lk 4:25; 15:14; Ac 11:28; ὁρμή (q.v.) 14:5; war Rv 12:7; sharp contention Ac 15:39; tear (in a garment) Mt 9:16; Mk 2:21; Lk 6:49; silence (s. σιγή) Ac 21:40; Rv 8:1; στάσις (q.v. 2) Lk 23:19; Ac 15:2; 23:7, 10; concourse 21:30; confusion 19:23; shout, loud voice 2:6; 19:34; Rv 11:15; dispute Lk 22:24; envy, strife 1 Ti 6:4; astonishment AcPl Ha 4, 25; joy 6, 3; prayer 6, 7; offering 6, 37.
    of the various divisions of a day (Jdth 13:1; 1 Macc 5:30; 4 Macc 3:8 al.) γενομένης ἡμέρας when day came (Jos., Ant. 10, 202, Vi. 405) Lk 4:42; Ac 12:18; 16:35; 23:12; cp. Lk 6:13; 22:66; Ac 27:29, 33, 39. Difft. Mk 6:21 γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου when a convenient/opportune day arrived. ὀψέ (cp. Gen 29:25; 1 Km 25:37) 11:19. ὀψίας γενομένης Mt 8:16; 14:15, 23; 16:2; 26:20; 27:57; Mk 1:32; 6:47; 14:17; 15:42; cp. J 6:16. πρωί̈ας Mt 27:1; J 21:4. νύξ Ac 27:27. ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης when it had grown late Mk 6:35; cp. 15:33; Lk 22:14; Ac 26:4.
    to occur as process or result, happen, turn out, take place (Dicaearch., Fgm. 102 W.: a campaign ‘takes place’; Diod S 32 Fgm. 9c τὰς εἰς τ. πατέρα γεγενημένας ἁμαρτίας=the misdeeds ‘perpetrated’ against his father; 2 Macc 1:32; 13:17; 3 Macc 1:11; 4:12; 5:17 al.)
    gener. τοῦτο ὅλον γέγονεν all this took place w. ἵνα foll. Mt 1:22; 26:56. ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται until all has taken place (=is past) 5:18. πάντα τὰ γενόμενα everything that had happened (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 121 §508 τὰ γενόμενα; 1 Esdr 1:10; Jdth 15:1; 1 Macc 4:20; 2 Macc 10:21; 3 Macc 1:17) 18:31; cp. 21:21; 24:6, 20, 34; 26:54; 27:54; 28:11; Mk 5:14. ἴδωμεν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τὸ γεγονός let us see this thing that has taken place Lk 2:15 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 15 [Stone p. 40]) θανάτου γενομένου since a death has occurred, i.e. since he has died Hb 9:15. τούτου γενομένου after this had happened (Jos., Ant. 9, 56; 129) Ac 28:9. τὸ γεγονός what had happened (Diod S 12, 49, 4; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 18 §496; Jos., Ant. 14, 292) Lk 8:34; 24:12. τὰ γεγονότα AcPl Ha 11, 1.—μὴ γένοιτο strong negation, in Paul only after rhet. questions (cp. TestJob 38:1; JosAs 25:8; Epict., index p. 540e; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 1, 2, Dial. Meretr. 13, 4; Achilles Tat. 5, 18, 4; Aristaen., Ep. 1, 27) by no means, far from it, God forbid (Goodsp., Probs., 88; AMalherbe, HTR 73, ’80, 231–41) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 6, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21. In more extensive phrasing (the LXX has exx. only of this usage: Gen 44:17; 3 Km 20:3 al.; cp. Josh 22:29; Demosth. 10, 27; Alciphron 2, 5, 3 al.; Ael. Aristid. 23, 80 K.=42 p. 795 D.; 30 p. 578 D.; 54 p. 679 ὸ̔ μὴ γένοιτο) Gal 6:14; w. ἵνα foll. AcPl Ha 7, 40. τί γέγονεν ὅτι (cp. Eccl 7:10) why is it that J 14:22.—Of festivals: be held, take place, come (X., Hell. 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια; 4, 5, 1; 4 Km 23:22f; 2 Macc 6:7) feast of dedication J 10:22; passover Mt 26:2; sabbath Mk 6:2; wedding J 2:1.—Abs. impv. (put twice for emphasis as Lucian, Pisc. 1 βάλλε, βάλλε; Philostrat., Ep. 35, 1 λάβε λάβε; Procop. Soph., Ep. 45) γενηθήτω γενηθήτω so let it be as a closing formula 1 Cor 16:24 v.l. (cp. Herodas 4, 85, where the sacristan closes his prayer to Asclepius with the words: ὧδε ταῦτʼ εἴη=so may it be).—On γένοιτο ἀμήν GJs 6:2 s. ἀμήν 1a.
    w. dat. of pers. affected
    α. w. inf. foll. (UPZ 24, 29 al.; 1 Macc 13:5; Jos., Ant. 6, 232) ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι so that he would not have to lose time Ac 20:16.
    β. w. adv. or adv. phrase added (1 Esdr 6:33) κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν according to your faith let it be done to you, i.e. you believe, and you won’t be disappointed Mt 9:29; cp. 8:13. γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου may that happen to me as you have said Lk 1:38. πῶς ἐγένετο τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ what had happened to the possessed man Mk 5:16. ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it may be well w. you Eph 6:3 (Dt 5:16; cp. Epict. 2, 5, 29 εὖ σοι γένοιτο; Aelian, VH 9, 36). γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done for you as you desire, i.e. your wish is granted Mt 15:28.
    γ. w. nom. of thing (1 Macc 4:25; Sir 51:17; Ar. 15:5) γίνεταί τινί τι someth. happens to or befalls a person Mk 9:21. ἵνα μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι γένηται lest someth. worse come upon you J 5:14. τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ what has happened to him Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1, 23; AcPl Ha 5, 20). τὸ γεγενημένον αὐτῷ Ac 3:10 D. ἐγίνετο πάσῃ ψυχῄ φόβος fear came upon everyone (cp. Tob 11:18) 2:43. λύπη AcPl Ha 6, 16. Freq. γέγονε ἐμοί τι someth. has come to me= I have someth.: πώρωσις τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν a hardening (of heart) has befallen Israel Ro 11:25; σωτηρία τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γεγένηται GJs 19:2; cp. Lk 19:9; διὰ τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν γενομένην Παύλῳ AcPl Ha 3, 15; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα if a man has a hundred sheep Mt 18:12. τοῖς ἔξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται those outside receive everything in parables Mk 4:11. μήποτε γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι that you may receive no repayment Lk 14:12; cp. 19:9; J 15:7; 1 Cor 4:5.
    w. gen. of pers. (Diod S 16, 64, 2 τὸν τῆς Ἑλένης γεγενημένον ὅρμον=the necklace that had belonged to Helen): ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κόσμου τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν the kingdom of the world has come into the possession of our Lord Rv 11:15.
    γίνεταί τι ἐπί τινι someth. happens in the case of or to a person Mk 5:33 v.l.; ἐν v.l. This can also be expressed w. εἴς τινα Ac 28:6 or the double nom. τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο what had become of Peter 12:18 (cp. Jos., Vi. 296 οἱ εἴκοσι χρυσοῖ τὶ γεγόνασιν).
    w. inf. foll., to emphasize the actual occurrence of the action denoted by the verb: ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό if it comes about that he finds it= if he actually finds it Mt 18:13 (s. PCatt V, 19f [=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 V] ἐὰν γένηταί με ἀποδημεῖν; PAmh 135, 10; BGU 970, 5). ἐγένετο αὐτὸν παραπορεύεσθαι he happened to be passing Mk 2:23; cp. Lk 6:1, 6. ἐγένετο ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν just then the heaven opened Lk 3:21; cp. 16:22 (ἐν τῷ ἀποθανεῖν P75); Ac 4:5; 9:3, 32, 37, 43; 11:26; 14:1; 16:16; 19:1; 21:1, 5; 22:6, 17; 27:44; 28:8 (UPZ 62, 29 [161 B.C.] γίνεται γὰρ ἐντραπῆναι).
    καὶ ἐγένετο (ἐγένετο δέ) periphrastic like וַיְהִי with וַ foll. to indicate the progress of the narrative; it is followed either by a conjunction like ὅτε, ὡς etc., or a gen. abs., or a prepositional constr., and joined to it is a finite verb w. καί (Jdth 5:22; 10:1; Sus 19 Theod.; 1 Macc 1:1; 5:1; Gen 39:7, 13, 19; 42:35; JosAs 11:1; 22:1; AscIs 3:2) Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15 v.l.; Lk 2:15; 5:1, 12, 17; 8:1, 22; 14:1.—Without the second καί (Jdth 2:4; 12:10; 13:12; 1 Macc 6:8; 7:2 v.l.; 9:23; Sus 28 Theod.; Bel 18 Theod.; TestAbr B 1 p. 105, 1 [Stone p. 58] and 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; TestJob 31:1; JosAs 1:1; 3:1) Mt 7:28; 11:1; 13:53; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 1:9; 4:4; Lk 1:8, 23, 41, 59; 2:1, 6, 46; 6:12 al. At times it is followed by an inf. The phrase is usually omitted in translation; older versions transl. it came to pass.—Mlt. 16f; MJohannessohn, Das bibl. καὶ ἐγένετο u. s. Geschichte: ZVS 53, 1926, 161–212 (LXX); s. MDibelius, Gnomon 3, 1927, 446–50; HPernot, Études sur la langue des Évangiles 1927, 189–99; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 29–62; JReiling, BT 16, ’65, 153–63; EDelebecque, Études grecques sur l’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65.
    to experience a change in nature and so indicate entry into a new condition, become someth.
    w. nouns (Lamellae Aur. Orphicae ed. AOlivieri 1915, p. 16, 5 θεὸς ἐγένου ἐξ ἀνθρώπου [IV/III]; Arrian, Anab. 5, 26, 5; Sir 51:2; 1 Esdr 4:26; Wsd 8:2; 4 Macc 16:6; En 103:11; Tat. 19, 2 τοῦ θανάτου καταφρονηταὶ γίνεσθε): ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν that you may become sons of your father Mt 5:45; ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων I will turn you into fishers of people Mk 1:17; a traitor Lk 6:16; friends 23:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 121); children of God J 1:12; children of light 12:36; a Christian Ac 26:29; apostle AcPlCor 2:4; a father Ro 4:18; a fool 1 Cor 3:18; a spectacle 4:9; a man, an adult 13:11 (Tob 1:9); a curse Gal 3:13. οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα he did not exalt himself to be made high priest Hb 5:5; ἐγένετο ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ Σαμουήλ Samuel became (high priest) in his place GJs 10:2. W. double nom. (Ps.-Apollod., Epit. 3, 15 δράκων λίθος ἐγένετο; Quint. Smyrn. 12, 507; Bel 28; 4 Macc 18:7) οἱ λίθοι ἄρτοι γίνονται the stones turn into loaves Mt 4:3. τὸ αἵμα αὐτοῦ λίθον γεγενημένον GJs 24:3. ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (the reverse PBerl 13044, col. III, 28ff [UWilcken, SBBerlAk 1923, 161f] τί ποιῶν ἄν τις γένοιτο θεός;). τὸ ὕδωρ γενήσεται πηγή 4:14. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν Ro 2:25. ἐγενόμην ἐγὼ διάκονος I became a courier Col 1:23 (cp. Herodian 2, 6, 8 ἀνὴρ ἔπαρχος γενόμενος).—Also γ. εἴς τι (Menand., Peric. 49f Kö. [169f S.] τὸ κακὸν εἰς ἀγαθὸν ῥέπει γινόμενον; 1 Km 4:9; Jdth 5:18; 1 Macc 2:11, 43; 3:58; En 19:2 al.; B-D-F §145, 1): ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον it became a tree Lk 13:19; εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; Ac 4:11; 1 Pt 2:7 (all in ref. to Ps 117:22); εἰς χαρὰν γ. change (or, turn) into joy J 16:20. εἰς οὐδέν come to nothing Ac 5:36. εἰς παγίδα Ro 11:9 (Ps 68:23); εἰς κενὸν γ. be done in vain 1 Th 3:5. εἰς ἄψινθον Rv 8:11. Cp. AcPl Ha 6, 6. Also w. γίνεσθαι omitted: εἰς κατάκριμα (sc. ἐγένετο τὸ κρίμα) Ro 5:18.
    used w. an adj. to paraphrase the passive (Jdth 11:11; 1 Esdr 7:3; 2 Macc 3:34; Sus 64 Theod.; En 103:9; Ath. 37, 1 πάντων ὑποχειρίων γιγνομένων): ἁπαλὸν γ. become tender Mt 24:32; Mk 13:28; ἀπειθῆ γ. Ac 26:19; ἀποσυνάγωγον γ. be expelled fr. the synagogue J 12:42; ἄφαντον γ. disappear Lk 24:31; σκωληκόβρωτον γ. be eaten by worms Ac 12:23; γνωστόν, φανερὸν γ. become known (Just., A I, 63, 6) Mk 6:14; Ac 1:19; 9:42; 19:17; 1 Cor 3:13; 14:25; Phil 1:13; δόκιμον γ. pass the test Js 1:12; ἑδραῖον γ. 1 Cor 15:58; ἔκδηλον γ. 2 Ti 3:9; AcPlCor 1:16; ἔξυπνον γ. Ac 16:27 (1 Esdr 3:3=Jos., Ant. 11:34); s. ἀπόπληκτος, ἐλεύθερος, ἐμφανής, ἔμφοβος, ἐνεργής, ἔντρομος, καθαρός, μέγας, περιδάκρυτος, περικρατής, πλήρης, πρηνής, τυφλός, ὑγιής, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, φανερός 1.
    w. ἐν of a state of being (Stoic. III 221, 16; Diod S 20, 62, 4 ἐν ἀνέσει γ.; Plut., Tit. Flam. 378 [16, 1] ἐν ὀργῇ γ.; Lucian, Tim. 28; PPetr II, 20; III, 12 [252 B.C.] ἐν ἐπισχέσει γ.; BGU 5 II, 19 ἐν νόσῳ; POxy 471 IV, 77f; 4 Km 9:20; 1 Macc 1:27 v.l.; Sus 8 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 320, Ant. 16, 372; Mel., P. 18 ἐν πόνοις … ἐν πληγαῖς etc.) ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ Lk 22:44. ἐν ἐκστάσει Ac 22:17. ἐν πνεύματι under the Spirit’s influence Rv 1:10; 4:2; AcPl Ha 6, 28. ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων be like human beings Phil 2:7. ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, φόβῳ, τρόμῳ 1 Cor 2:3. ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:7. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γ. come to one’s senses (Soph., Phil. 950; X., An. 1, 5, 17; Polyb. 1, 49, 8; Chariton 3, 9, 11) Ac 12:11; γ. ἐν Χριστῷ be a Christian Ro 16:7. Cp. 7 below.
    to make a change of location in space, move
    εἴς τι (Hdt. 5, 87 al.; Philo, Op. M. 86; 2 Macc 1:13; also ἐν: Just., A II, 9, 3 ἐγενόμεθα ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ τόπω): εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα γ. (Jos., Ant. 10, 42) Ac 20:16; 21:17; 25:15. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν Hv 3, 1, 4. Of a voice: ἐγένετο εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου reached my ear Lk 1:44. Fig. (cp. Bar 4:28) of Abraham’s blessing εἰς τὰ ἔθνη come to the Gentiles Gal 3:14; cp. 2 Cor 8:14 (s. περίσσευμα 1, ὑστέρημα 1).
    ἔκ τινος (Job 28:2): γ. ἐκ μέσου be removed, Lat. e medio tolli (cp. Ps.-Aeschin., Ep. 12, 6 ἐκ μέσου γενομένων ἐκείνων; Plut., Timol. 238 [5, 3]; Achilles Tat. 2, 27, 2) 2 Th 2:7 (HFulford, ET 23, 1912, 40f: ‘leave the scene’). Of a voice fr. heaven: ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν γ. sound forth fr. heaven (2 Macc 2:21; cp. Da 4:31 Theod.) Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; 9:35; cp. vs. 36.
    ἐπί τι: ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον go to the tomb Lk 24:22; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς when he was at the steps Ac 21:35. Of fear that befalls someone (2 Macc 12:22) Lk 1:65; 4:36; Ac 5:5. Of ulcers: break out on someone Rv 16:2 (Ex 9:10f). Of divine commands: go out to someone Lk 3:2. ἐπί is somet. used w. the gen. (Appian, Liby. 93 §440; Alex. Aphr., Mixt. II 2 p. 213, 21) instead of the acc.: γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου when he had arrived at the place 22:40 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 327, 18 ἐπὶ τ. τόπων γινόμενος).—J 6:21.
    w. κατά and gen. of place: τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας the message that has spread throughout all Judea Ac 10:37. W. acc. of place (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 15; Apollon. Paradox. 3 κατὰ τόπους γ.; Jos., Ant. I, 174; cp. 2 Macc 9:8): γενόμενος κατὰ τὸν τόπον Lk 10:32; γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον Ac 27:7.
    w. πρός and acc. of the direction and goal (PLond III, 962, 1 p. 210 [III A.D.] γενοῦ πρὸς Ἄταϊν τὸν ποιμένα; PFlor 180, 45) 1 Cor 2:3; 2J 12. Of divine instructions be given to someone (Gen 15:1, 4; Jer 1:2, 11; 13:8; Ezk 6:1; Hos 1:1; cp. ἐπί w. acc.) J 10:35; Ac 7:31 v.l.; 10:13; 13:32.
    w. σύν and the dat. join someone (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 8; 2 Macc 13:13) Lk 2:13.
    w. ἐγγύς (X., An. 1, 8, 8, Cyr. 7, 1, 7; cp. γίν. πλησίον Philo, Mos. 1, 228; Jos., Ant. 4, 40): ἐγγὺς τοῦ πλοίου γίνεσθαι come close to the boat J 6:19. Fig. of the relation of believers to Christ: come near Eph 2:13.
    w. ὧδε come here J 6:25;
    ἔμπροσθέν τινος γ. J 1:15, 30 s. on ἔμπροσθεν 1bζ and ὀπίσω 2b.
    to come into a certain state or possess certain characteristics, to be, prove to be, turn out to be (on relation to the forms of εἰμί [here and in 8–10] s. ALink, StKr 69, 1896, 420ff). Used w. the nom. (Wsd 16:3; Jdth 16:21; Sir 31:22; 1 Macc 3:58) γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι be prudent Mt 10:16. ἄκαρπος γίνεται 13:22; Mk 4:19.—W. other words: vs. 22; 9:50; Lk 1:2; 2:2; 6:36 and very oft. Freq. the dat. of advantage (dat. commodi) is added (1 Macc 10:47; 2 Macc 7:37; 4 Macc 6:28; 12:17): ἀγαπητόν τινι γ. be dear to someone 1 Th 2:8. ἀπρόσκοπον γ. τινι be inoffensive to someone 1 Cor 10:32; γ. τινι μαθητήν J 15:8; μισθαποδότην γ. τινι be a rewarder of someone Hb 11:6; γ. ὁδηγόν τινι Ac 1:16. Cp. παρηγορία, σημεῖον, τύπος.—γ. ὁμοθυμαδόν come together in unanimity or reach unanimity Ac 15:25.—τὶ γίνεταί τινί τι a thing results in someth. for someone τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγ. θάνατος; Ro 7:13. ἡ ἐξουσία πρόσκομμα τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 Cor 8:9.—γίνομαι ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὡσεί τις (Ps 21:15; 31:9; 37:15; 82:11; 87:5 al.) be, become, show oneself like Mt 6:16; 10:25; 18:3; 28:4; Lk 22:26, 44; 1 Cor 4:13; 9:20f; Gal 4:12. καθὼς ἐγένετο … οὕτως ἔσται as it was … so it will be Lk 17:26, 28. οὐ χρὴ ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι this should not be so Js 3:10. ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως καὶ ἀμέμπτως ὑμῖν ἐγενήθημεν we proved/showed ourselves … toward you 1 Th 2:10.—In statements pert. to age (Aristoxenus, Fgm. 16 γεγονότα [sc. τὸν Πυθαγόραν] ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα; Demetr. of Phaleron [IV–III B.C.], Fgm. 153 Wehrli [’49]; Demetr: 722 Fgm. 1, 1 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 10, 50) ἐτῶν δώδεκα Lk 2:42; cp. 1 Ti 5:9.—Here prob. also belongs ἐγένετο γνώμης he decided Ac 20:3 (cp. Plut., Phoc. 752 [23, 4] ἐλπίδος μεγάλης γ.; Cass. Dio 61, 14 τ. ἐπιθυμίας γ.; Jos., Bell. 6, 287).
    to be present at a given time, be there ([Ps.-]Jos., Ant. 18, 63) Mk 1:4; J 1:6, hence exist (Diod S 3, 52, 4 γέγονε γένη γυναικῶν=there have been nations of women; Appian, Maced. 18 §3 τὸ χρυσίον τὸ γιγνόμενον=the gold that was at hand; Bar 3:26; 2 Macc 10:24) Ro 11:5; 1J 2:18. ἐγένετο there lived Lk 1:5. ἔν τινι 2 Pt 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Rv 16:18 (Da 12:1 Theod.).
    to be closely related to someone or someth., belong to
    gen. of the possessor (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 79 §336 a slave γεγένητο Πομπηίου=had belonged to Pompey: B-D-F §162, 7) belong to someone Lk 20:14, 33 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 83 §350 γυνὴ Κράσσου γεγενημένη=who had been the wife of [the younger] Crassus).
    w. dat. of pers. belong to someone (PPetr II, 40b, 7 [277 B.C.]; O. Wilck II, 1530, 2f [120 B.C.] τὸ γινόμενόν μοι=what belongs to me) of a woman ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ Ro 7:3f (cp. Ruth 1:12f; Dt 24:2).
    w. prep. μετά τινος (Josh 2:19) Ac 9:19; 20:18. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his intimate friends Mk 16:10. πρός τινα be w. someone 1 Cor 16:10 ( make him [Timothy] feel quite at home with you Mft.) ὑπό τινα be under the authority of someone or someth. (1 Macc 10:38) Gal 4:4.
    Here perh. belongs ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται it is not a matter of private interpretation 2 Pt 1:20.
    to be in or at a place, be in, be there
    ἔν τινι to designate one’s present or future place of residence (X., An. 4, 3, 29; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 4 §15 Ἀντώνιος ἐν Ἐφέσῳ γενόμενος; Aelian, VH 4, 15; Herodian 2, 2, 5; POxy 283, 11; 709, 6 ἐν Μένφει γενόμενος; PTebt 416, 3; BGU 731 II, 6 ἐν οἰκίᾳ μου; Num 11:35; Judg 17:4; 1 Ch 14:17; Jdth 5:7 al. Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 18 Jac.) Mt 26:6; Mk 9:33; Ac 7:38; 13:5; 2 Ti 1:17; Rv 1:9; AcPl Ha 7, 23.
    w. adv.: ἐκεῖ (X., An. 6, 5, 20; 3 Km 8:8 v.l.; Jos., Ant. 10, 180) Ac 19:21. κατὰ μόνας Mk 4:10.—B. 637. DELG s.v. γίγνομαι. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γίνομαι

  • 116 ζάω

    ζάω contr. ζῶ (Hom.+) impf. ἔζων (Ro 7:9 B ἔζην; on this form s. Schwyzer I 675; B-D-F §88; Mlt-H. 194, both w. ref.); fut. ζήσω (uniformly attested Ro 6:2; Hb 12:9); the later (since Hippocr. VII p. 536 L.; LXX; AscIs 3:9; Jos., Ant. 1, 193 al.) form ζήσομαι (B-D-F §77; Rob. 356) is more common (on the fut. forms s. JLee, NovT 22, ’80, 289–98; GKilpatrick, ibid. 25, ’83, 146–51); 1 aor. ἔζησα. On the LXX usage s. Thackeray 269; for forms in pap, Gignac II 370.
    to be alive physically, live
    of physical life in contrast to death
    α. gener. Ac 22:22; Ro 7:1, 2, 3; 14:8ac; 1 Cor 7:39; 2 Cor 5:15a; 6:9; Hb 9:17. ψυχὴ ζῶσα a living soul (Gen 1:20 al.; Just., D. 6, 1 ζῇ ψυχῇ) 1 Cor 15:45 (Gen 2:7); Rv 16:3 v.l. ὅσα ἔτη ζῇ as many years as he lives B 10:6 (cp. SIG 663, 6; Sb 173, 6 Αὐρήλιος ζήσας ἔτη νε´; En 10:10). τὸ ζῆν life (Attic wr., ins, pap, LXX) ὥστε ἐξαπορηθῆναι ἡμᾶς καὶ τοῦ ζῆν so that we even despaired of life 2 Cor 1:8. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν during the whole lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. Diod S 1, 74, 3 διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον; 4, 46, 4). ἔτι ζῶν while he was still living= before his death Mt 27:63 (CB I/2 660 no. 618 Ζώσιμος ἔτι ζῶν κατεσκεύασεν; 3 Km 12:6). ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν … εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός they were thrown alive into the lake of fire Rv 19:20. ζῶσα τέθνηκεν though alive she is dead 1 Ti 5:6 (cp. Sextus 7). ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες we during our (earthly) life 2 Cor 4:11; the same phrase= we who are still living 1 Th 4:15, 17. Here the opp. is νεκροί, as in Mt 22:32; Mk 12:27; Lk 20:38a. ζῶντες καὶ νεκροί the living and the dead Ac 10:42; Ro 14:9b; 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; 2 Cl 1:1; B 7:2.—Occasionally the contrast betw. νεκρός and ζῆν is used fig. with ref. to the realm of religion and ethics Lk 15:24 v.l., 32.
    β. of dead persons who return to life become alive again: of humans in general (3 Km 17:23) Mt 9:18; Ac 9:41; 20:12; Rv 20:4, 5; AcPl Ha 11, 7. Of Jesus Mk 16:11; Lk 24:5, 23; Ac 1:3; 25:19; Ro 14:9a; 2 Cor 13:4a; Rv 1:18b; 2:8 (Just., D. 69, 6 νεκροὺς … ζῆν ποιήσας).
    γ. of sick persons, if their illness terminates not in death but in recovery be well, recover (Artem. 4, 4 ἔζησεν ὁ παῖς=became well; 5, 71; 72; PGM 1, 188; 4 Km 1:2; 8:8 εἰ ζήσομαι ἐκ τῆς ἀρρωστίας μου ταύτης; Jos., Vi. 421) Mk 5:23; J 4:50, 51, 53.—Of removal of anxiety 1 Th 3:8.
    δ. also of healthy persons live on, remain alive (X., An. 3, 2, 39 ὅστις δὲ ζῆν ἐπιθυμεῖ πειράσθω νικᾶν; Ep. 56 of Apollonius of Tyana [Philostrat. I 359, 14]; ApcMos 31 διὰ τί σὺ ἀποθνῄσκεις καγὼ ζῶ;) Ac 25:24; 28:4. ἐὰν ὁ κύριος θελήσῃ ζήσομεν Js 4:15. ὸ̓ς ἔχει τὴν πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης καὶ ἔζησεν Rv 13:14.
    ε. of beings that in reality, or as they are portrayed, are not subject to death: of Melchizedek Hb 7:8 (opp. ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι). Jesus as everlasting high priest πάντοτε ζῶν 7:25.—In this sense it is most comprehensively applied to God (s. CBurchard, Untersuch. zu JosAs p. 103) (ὁ) θεὸς (ὁ) ζῶν (cp. 4 Km 19:4, 16; Is 37:4, 17; Hos 2:1; Da 6:21 Theod.; 3 Macc 6:28; TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 10 [Stone p. 46]; TestJob 37:2; JosAs 49:3 al.; SibOr 3, 763; POxy 924, 11 [IV A.D., Gnostic]; PGM 4, 1038 ὁ μέγας ζῶν θεός; 7, 823; 12, 79; Philo, Decal. 67 ὁ ζῶν ἀεὶ θεός; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 59, 18.—The phrase ‘the living God’ is not found in Joseph.) Mt 16:16; 26:63; J 6:69 v.l.; Ac 14:15; Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 3:3; 6:16; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Ti 3:15; 4:10; 6:17 v.l.; Hb 3:12; 9:14; 10:31; 12:22; Rv 1:18a; 4:10; 7:2; 10:6; 2 Cl 20:2; GJs 20:1; AcPl Ha 2, 32; also ὁ ζῶν πατήρ J 6:57. W. the addition εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων Rv 15:7; cp. 4:9 (cp. Tob 13:2; Sir 18:1). God takes a sovereign oath in the words ζῶ ἐγώ as surely as I live (Num 14:28 al.) Ro 14:11 (Is 49:18; classical parallels GStählin, NovT 5, ’62, 142 n. 2). ζῇ κύριος ὁ θεός [μου] as surely as the Lord my God lives GJs 4:1; 6:1; 13:3; 15:3; 19:3 (Judg 8:19; 1 Km 25:34 al; GrBar 1:7; cp. ApcEsdr 2:7); in expanded form καὶ ζῇ ὁ Χριστὸς αὐτοῦ 15:4 (s. deStrycker ad loc.).—Christ lives διὰ τὸν πατέρα because of the Father J 6:57b (s. Bultmann, comm. ad loc.).
    w. mention of that upon which life depends ἐπί τινι on the basis of someth. (Andoc. 1, 100; Isocr. 10, 18; Ael. Aristid. 28, 103 K.=49 p. 525 D.) ζ. ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3). ζ. ἔκ τινος obtain one’s living fr. someth. (Aristoph., Eccl. 591; Demosth. 57, 36; POxy 1117, 19; 1557, 12; TestJob 47:1f) 1 Cor 9:14.
    w. more precise mention of the sphere (Artem. 3, 62 ἐν ἀγορᾷ ζ.=spend his life in the marketplace) ζ. ἐν σαρκί live in the flesh in contrast to the heavenly life Phil 1:22; Gal 2:20c; ζ. ἐν κόσμῳ live in the world Col 2:20. ζ. ἐν θεῷ, live in God (as the Being who penetrates and embraces everything) Ac 17:28 (s. κινέω 3). For AcPl Ha 1, 15 s. 2a end.
    to live in a transcendent sense, live, of the sanctified life of a child of God (ζῆν in the sense of a higher type of life than the animal: X., Mem. 3, 3, 11; Cass. Dio 69, 19: after years of public service, Similis retires and prepares this epitaph: Σίμιλις ἐνταύθα κεῖται βιοὺς μὲν ἔτη τόσα, ζήσας δὲ ἔτη ἑπτά=Here lies Similis, existing for so many years, but alive for only seven.).
    in the world ἐγὼ ἔζων χωρὶς νόμου ποτέ I was once (truly) alive without law (this has been interpr. to mean when no law existed; Paul is then regarded as speaking fr. the viewpoint of humanity in paradise before the command Gen 2:16 f; 3:3. Another interpr. thinks of Paul as referring to the period in his life when he was not conscious of the existence and significance of the law. In view of Paul’s climactic affirmation in Ro 7:25, Paul probably illustrates in the first person the perils of a Christian who succumbs to the illusion that moral action is connected with law rather than with the ‘spirit of life in Christ’ Ro 8:2) Ro 7:9. Even now those who listen to the voice of the Son of God enjoy this life J 5:25; cp. 11:26; likew. those who receive him into their being ὁ τρώγων τὸν ἄρτον 6:57c; cp. Ro 6:11, 13 (ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας); Gal 2:19; Rv 3:1. This heavenly life on earth is a ζ. πνεύματι Gal 5:25 or a life not of mere human achievement, but of Christ who lives in Christians 2:20ab. Also of the superhuman power of the apostle ζήσομεν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς we shall live with him (Christ) through God’s power in our dealings with you 2 Cor 13:4. ὁ κύριος βούλεται ζῆν ἡμᾶς ἐν θεῷ=the Lord wills that we live under God’s direction AcPl Ha 1, 15 (opp. ἀποθανεῖν ἐν ἁμαρτίαις; s. 1c end)
    in the glory of the life to come (Sir 48:11; cp. Dt 4:1; 8:1; 30:16).
    α. abs. Lk 10:28; J 11:25; 14:19; Ro 8:13b; Hb 12:9. ἐμοὶ τ. ζῆν Χριστός= life is possible for me only where Christ is (hence death is gain) Phil 1:21 (s. OSchmitz, GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 155–69). Another common interpr. is for me to live is Christ, i.e. while I am alive I experience real life in connection with Christ; w. death comes life in all fullness in the presence of Jesus.
    β. More specifically εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα have eternal life (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 17 ζῆν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα; PsSol 14:2) J 6:51, 58 (in J the blessed life which the follower of Jesus enjoys here and now in the body is simply continued in the heavenly life of the future. In other respects also the dividing line betw. the present and the future life is somet. nonexistent or at least not discernible); B 6:3; 8:5; 9:2; 11:10f; ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ (i.e. Χριστῷ) ζ. live together with Christ 1 Th 5:10; ζ. διʼ αὐτοῦ (i.e. Chr.) 1J 4:9; ζ. κατὰ θεὸν πνεύματι live, as God (lives), in the Spirit 1 Pt 4:6. ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται (cp. Hab 2:4) he that is just through faith will have life Ro 1:17 (AFeuillet, NTS 6, ’59, 52–80; but s. Fitzmyer, Ro [AB] ad loc.); Gal 3:11; Hb 10:38. This life is τὸ ἀληθινὸν ζῆν ITr 9:2; IEph 11:1. Christ is called τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν our unshakable or inseparable life 3:2. τὸ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν our total life 1 Mg 1:2—The law-directed pers. believes concerning legal performance: ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς (Lev 18:5) Gal 3:12; cp. Ro 10:5 (cp. Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 1 οἱ τοῦτον [= τ. νόμον] φυλάττοντες ἔχονται τῆς σωτηρίας=those who observe law have a firm grip on security).
    to conduct oneself in a pattern of behavior, live (Hom. et al.)
    used w. adverbs or other modifiers: adv. (Sallust. 19 p. 34, 25 κακῶς ζῆν [Just., A I, 4, 7]; SIG 889, 13ff; Wsd 14:28; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 198; Ath. 3, 1 δίκην θηρίων) ἀσώτως Lk 15:13. ἐθνικῶς and ἰουδαϊκῶς Gal 2:14. εὐσεβῶς 2 Ti 3:12. πανούργως Hm 3, 3. σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως κ. εὐσεβῶς Tit 2:12 (Plut., Mor. 1108c ζῆν σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως; cp. Diog. L. 10, 132; 140; Ar. 15, 10).—Φαρισαῖος live as a Pharisee Ac 26:5. ἐν πίστει Gal 2:20d. ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ Ro 6:2; ζ. ἐν τούτοις live in these (sins) Col 3:7. κατὰ ἀλήθειαν in keeping w. the truth IEph 6:2 (cp. Philo, Post. Cai. 73 κατὰ βούλημα τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ζ.; Jos., Ant. 4, 302 κατὰ τ. νόμους ζ.; Just., D. 47, 4 κατὰ τὸν νόμον; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 12, 7 κατὰ τὰς θείας γραφάς). κατὰ θεόν 8:1 (cp. SIG 910 A and B). κατὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν IPhld 3:2. κατὰ Χριστιανισμόν live in accordance w. (our) commitment to Christ IMg 10:1. κατὰ σάρκα Ro 8:12f; Dg 5:8; κατὰ κυριακὴν ζ. (opp. σαββατίζειν) include the observance of the Lord’s day in one’s life IMg 9:1. Of a married woman ζ. μετὰ ἀνδρός live w. her husband Lk 2:36 (for the added acc. of extent of time cp. Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 332 D.; Pr 28:16; ἥτις ἔζησεν καλῶς μετʼ ἐμοῦ ἔτη 28, μῆνας 4, ἡμέρας 5: SEG II, 384, 6–8 [restored]; s. also FDanker, Jesus and the New Age ’88, 71).
    τινί live for someone or someth., for the other’s benefit (Hom. et al.; Demosth. 7, 17 οἳ οὐκ αἰσχύνονται Φιλίππῳ ζῶντες καὶ οὐ τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι; Dionys. Hal. 3, 17 … παῖδες, τῷ πατρὶ ζῶντες) ζ. τῷ θεῷ (4 Macc 7:19; 16:25; Philo, Mut. Nom. 13, Rer. Div. Her. 111; s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 10) Lk 20:38b (cp. Soph., Ajax 970); Ro 6:10, 11; Gal 2:19; Hm 3:5; AcPl Ha 10, 7; τῷ κυρίῳ Ro 14:8b (cp. Plut., Cleom. 819 [31, 5]). For Christ 2 Cor 5:15; τῷ ἐμῷ βασιλεῖ AcPl Ha 9, 26 (restored after Aa I 112, 14) τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζ. 1 Pt 2:24; ἑαυτῷ ζ. live for oneself (Menand., Fgm. 646 Kö. οὐχ ἑαυτῷ ζῆν μόνον; Diod S 10, 33, 2 ζ. ἑαυτοῖς=live for themselves) Ro 14:7.
    to be full of vitality, be lively the ptc. is used fig. w. respect to things (cp. τῶν δένδρων τῶν ζῶντων ParJer 9:3), of spring water in contrast w. cistern water ὕδωρ ζῶν (Gen 26:19; Lev 14:5; Jer 2:13 v.l.; Zech 14:8.—Stagnant water is called ὕ. νεκρόν: Synes., Ep. 114, 254d) J 4:10f (Hdb. exc. on J 4:14); 7:38; D 7:1f (Wengst p. 77 n. 57). ζώσας πηγάς Rv 7:17 v.l.
    to be life-productive, offer life ptc. used w. respect to things (SIG 1173 [138 A.D.], 5 ζῶσαι ἀρεταὶ ἐγένοντο=miracles full of divine life occurred) λόγια ζῶντα words that meant life Ac 7:38. λόγος ζῶν θεοῦ 1 Pt 1:23; cp. Hb 4:12. ὁδὸς ζῶσα a living way 10:20. ἐλπὶς ζῶσα a living hope 1 Pt 1:3.—ζ. is also used of things which serve as descriptions of pers. who communicate divine life: of Christ ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν J 6:51a. λίθος ζῶν 1 Pt 2:4. Of Christians: θυσία ζῶσα a living sacrifice Ro 12:1. λίθοι ζῶντες 1 Pt 2:5.—τὰ παρὰ ζώσης φωνῆς καὶ μενούσης the (words) of a living and abiding voice Papias (2:4) (opp. ἐκ τῶν βιβλίων).—Lit. s. ζωή end. DELG s.v. ζώω.M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ζάω

  • 117 ἴδιος

    ἴδιος, ία, ον (Hom.+; s. B-D-F §286; W-S. §22, 17; Rob. 691f; Mlt-Turner 191f.—For the spelling ἵδιος s. on ὀλίγος.)
    pert. to belonging or being related to oneself, one’s own
    in contrast to what is public property or belongs to another: private, one’s own (exclusively) (opp. κοινός, as Pla., Pol. 7, 535b; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 41 §171; Ath. 25, 4) οὐδὲ εἷς τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν ἴδιον εἶναι nor did anyone claim that anything the person had was private property or nor did anyone claim ownership of private possessions Ac 4:32; cp. D 4:8.
    in respect to circumstance or condition belonging to an individual (opp. ἀλλότριος) κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν according to each one’s capability (in contrast to that of others) Mt 25:15. τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰ. ζητεῖ J 7:18; cp. 5:18, 43. ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν Lk 2:3 v.l. (for ἑαυτοῦ); sim. Mt 9:1 (noting the departure of Jesus to his home territory); cp. Dg 5:2. Christ ἐλευθερώσῃ πᾶσαν σάρκα διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. vs. 16 ἕκαστος τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν Ac 2:8; cp. 1:19 τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ αὐτῶν, without pron. 2:6 (Tat. 26, 1 τὴν ἰ. αὐτῆς … λέξιν); ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει 3:12; cp. 28:30; τἡν ἰ. (δικαιοσύνην) Ro 10:3; cp. 11:24; 14:4f. ἕκαστος τ. ἴ. μισθὸν λήμψεται κατὰ τ. ἴ. κόπον each will receive wages in proportion to each one’s labor 1 Cor 3:8. ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα her own husband 7:2 (Diog. L. 8, 43 πρὸς τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα πορεύεσθαι). ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα 7:7. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει (s. προλαμβάνω 1c) 1 Cor 11:21 (Eratosth.: 241 Fgm. 16 Jac. of the festival known as Lagynophoria τὰ κομισθέντα αὑτοῖς δειπνοῦσι κατακλιθέντες … κ. ἐξ ἰδίας ἕκαστος λαγύνου παρʼ αὑτῶν φέροντες πίνουσιν ‘they dine on the things brought them … and they each drink from a flagon they have personally brought’. Evaluation: συνοίκια ταῦτα ῥυπαρά• ἀνάγκη γὰρ τὴν σύνοδον γίνεσθαι παμμιγοῦς ὄχλου ‘that’s some crummy banquet; it’s certainly a meeting of a motley crew’); cp. 1 Cor 9:7; 15:38. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴ. φορτίον βαστάσει Gal 6:5.—Tit 1:12; Hb 4:10; 7:27; 9:12; 13:12.—J 4:44 s. 2 and 3b.
    pert. to a striking connection or an exclusive relationship, own (with emphasis when expressed orally, or italicized in written form) κοπιῶμεν ταῖς ἰ. χερσίν with our own hands 1 Cor 4:12 (first pers., cp. UPZ 13, 14 [158 B.C.] εἰμὶ μετὰ τ. ἀδελφοῦ ἰδίου=w. my brother; TestJob 34:3 ἀναχωρήσωμεν εἰς τὰς ἰδίας χώρας). ἐν τῷ ἰ. ὀφθαλμῷ in your own eye Lk 6:41; 1 Th 2:14; 2 Pt 3:17 (here the stability of the orthodox is contrasted with loss of direction by those who are misled by error). Ac 1:7 (God’s authority in sharp contrast to the apostles’ interest in determining a schedule of events). ἰ. θέλημα own will and ἰδία καρδία own heart or mind 1 Cor 7:37ab contrast with μὴ ἔχων ἀνάγκην ‘not being under compulsion’; hence ἰ. is not simply equivalent to the possessive gen. in the phrase ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. 1 Cor 6:18, ἰ. heightens the absurdity of sinning against one’s own body. Lk 10:34 (apparently the storyteller suggests that the wealthy Samaritan had more than one animal, but put his own at the service of the injured traveler). ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. ἐπὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἔμετον Pr 26:11), with heightening of disgust. Some would put J 4:44 here (s. 1 end). εἰς τὸν ἴδιον ἀγρόν Mt 22:5 (the rude guest prefers the amenities of his own estate). Mk 4:34b (Jesus’ close followers in contrast to a large crowd). Ac 25:19 (emphasizing the esoteric nature of sectarian disputes). Js 1:14 (a contrast, not between types of desire but of sources of temptation: those who succumb have only themselves to blame). διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου through his own blood Ac 20:28 (so NRSV mg.; cp. the phrase SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων commonly associated with the gifts of generous officials, s. 4b. That the ‘blood’ would be associated with Jesus would be quite apparent to Luke’s publics).
    pert. to a person, through substitution for a pronoun, own. Some of the passages cited in 2 may belong here. ἴ. is used for the gen. of αὐτός or the possess. pron., or for the possess. gen. ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῶν (this use found in Hellenistic wr. [Schmidt 369], in Attic [Meisterhans3-Schw. 235] and Magnesian [Thieme 28f] ins; pap [Kuhring—s. ἀνά beg.—14; Mayser II/2, 73f]. S. also Dssm., B 120f [BS 123f], and against him Mlt. 87–91. LXX oft. uses ἴ. without emphasis to render the simple Hebr. personal suffix [Gen 47:18; Dt 15:2; Job 2:11; 7:10, 13; Pr 6:2 al.], but somet. also employs it without any basis for it in the original text [Job 24:12; Pr 9:12; 22:7; 27:15]. Da 1:10, where LXX has ἴ., Theod. uses μου. 1 Esdr 5:8 εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν=2 Esdr 2:1 εἰς πόλιν αὐτοῦ; Mt 9:1 is formally sim., but its position in the narrative suggests placement in 1)
    with the second pers. (Jos., Bell. 6, 346 ἰδίαις χερσίν=w. your own hands). Eph 5:22 (cp. vs. 28 τὰς ἑαυτῶν γυναῖκας); 1 Th 4:11; 1 Pt 3:1.
    with the third pers. ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι J 4:44 (cp. ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ: Mt 13:57; Mk 6:4; Lk 4:24, but J 4:44 is expressed in a slightly difft. form and may therefore belong in 1b above); Mt 25:14; 15:20 v.l.; J 1:41 (UPZ 13, s. 2 above: ἀδ. ἴ.); Ac 1:19; 24:24; 1 Ti 6:1; Tit 2:5, 9; 1 Pt 3:5; MPol 17:3; AcPl Ha 3, 21; 4, 27 (context uncertain); τὸ ἴδιον πλάσμα AcPlCor 2:12, 1; ἴδιον χωρίον Papias (3:3).
    associates, relations οἱ ἴδιοι (comrades in battle: Polyaenus, Exc. 14, 20; SIG 709, 19; 22; 2 Macc 12:22; Jos., Bell. 1, 42, Ant. 12, 405; compatriots: ViHab 5 [p. 86, 7 Sch.]; Philo, Mos. 1, 177) fellow-Christians Ac 4:23; 24:23 (Just., D. 121, 3). The disciples (e.g., of a philosopher: Epict. 3, 8, 7) J 13:1. Relatives (BGU 37; POxy 932; PFay 110; 111; 112; 116; 122 al.; Vett. Val. 70, 5 ὑπὸ ἰδίων κ. φίλων; Sir 11:34; Just., A II, 7, 2 σὺν τοῖς ἰδίοις … Νῶε and D. 138, 2 Νῶε … μετὰ τῶν ἰδίων) 1 Ti 5:8; J 1:11b (the worshipers of a god are also so called: Herm. Wr. 1, 31).—Sg. τὸν ἴδιον J 15:19 v.l. (s. b below).
    home, possessions τὰ ἴδια home (Polyb. 2, 57, 5; 3, 99, 4; Appian, Iber. 23; Peripl. Eryth. 65 εἰς τὰ ἴδια; POxy 4, 9f ἡ ἀνωτέρα ψυχὴ τ. ἴδια γεινώσκει; 487, 18; Esth 5:10; 6:12; 1 Esdr 6:31 [τὰ ἴδια αὐτοῦ=2 Esdr 6:11 ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ]; 3 Macc 6:27, 37; 7:8; Jos., Ant. 8, 405; 416, Bell. 1, 666; 4, 528) J 16:32 (EFascher, ZNW 39, ’41, 171–230); 19:27; Ac 5:18 D; 14:18 v.l.; 21:6; AcPl Ha 8, 5. Many (e.g. Goodsp, Probs. 87f; 94–96; Field, Notes 84; RSV; but not Bultmann 34f; NRSV) prefer this sense for J 1:11a and Lk 18:28; another probability in both these pass. is property, possessions (POxy 489, 4; 490, 3; 491, 3; 492, 4 al.). ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων from his own well-stocked supply (oft. in ins e.g. fr. Magn. and Priene, also SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 [in such ins the focus is on the generosity of public-spirited officals who use their own resources to meet public needs]; Jos., Ant. 12, 158) J 8:44. The sg. can also be used in this way τὸ ἴδιον (SIG 1257, 3; BGU 1118, 31 [22 B.C.]) J 15:19 (v.l. τὸν ἴδιον, s. a above).—τὰ ἴδια one’s own affairs (X., Mem. 3, 4, 12; 2 Macc 9:20; 11:23 v.l., 26, 29) 1 Th 4:11, here πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια=mind your own business. Jd 6 of one’s proper sphere.
    pert. to a particular individual, by oneself, privately, adv. ἰδίᾳ (Aristoph., Thu.; Diod S 20, 21, 5 et al.; ins, pap, 2 Macc 4:34; Philo; Jos., Bell. 4, 224, C. Ap. 1, 225; Ath. 8, 1f) 1 Cor 12:11; IMg 7:1.—κατʼ ἰδίαν (Machon, Fgm. 11 vs. 121 [in Athen. 8, 349b]; Polyb. 4, 84, 8; Diod S 1, 21, 6; also ins [SIG 1157, 12 καὶ κατὰ κοινὸν καὶ κατʼ ἰδίαν ἑκάστῳ al.]; 2 Macc 4:5; 14:21; JosAs 7:1; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 136; Just., D. 5, 2) privately, by oneself (opp. κοινῇ: Jos., Ant. 4, 310) Mt 14:13, 23; 17:1, 19; 20:17; 24:3; Mk 4:34a; 6:31f; 7:33 (Diod S 18, 49, 2 ἕκαστον ἐκλαμβάνων κατʼ ἰδίαν=‘he took each one aside’); 9:2 (w. μόνος added), 28; 13:3; Lk 9:10; 10:23; Ac 23:19; Gal 2:2 (on the separate meeting cp. Jos., Bell. 2, 199 τ. δυνατοὺς κατʼ ἰδίαν κ. τὸ πλῆθος ἐν κοινῷ συλλέγων; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 40 §170); ISm 7:2.
    pert. to being distinctively characteristic of some entity, belonging to/peculiar to an individual ἕκαστον δένδρον ἐκ τ. ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται every tree is known by its own fruit Lk 6:44. τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα his (own) sheep J 10:3f. εἰς τὸν τόπον τ. ἴδιον to his own place (= the place where he belonged) Ac 1:25; cp. 20:28. The expression τοῦ ἰδίου υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο Ro 8:32 emphasizes the extraordinary nature of God’s gift: did not spare his very own Son (Paul’s association here with the ref. to pandemic generosity, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτο͂ν, contributes a semantic component to ἰ. in this pass.; for the pandemic theme see e.g. OGI 339, 29f; for donation of one’s own resources, ibid. 104; IGR 739, II, 59–62. For the term ὁ ἴδιος υἱός, but in difft. thematic contexts, see e.g. Diod S 17, 80, 1 of Parmenio; 17, 118, 1 of Antipater. In relating an instance in which a son was not spared Polyaenus 8, 13 has υἱὸς αὐτοῦ, evidently without emphasis, but Exc. 3, 7 inserts ἴδιος υἱός to emphasize the gravity of an officer’s own son violating an order.). 1 Cor 7:4ab. ἕκαστος ἐν. τ. ἰδίῳ τάγματι each one in his (own) turn 15:23 (cp. En 2:1 τ. ἰ. τάξιν). καιροὶ ἴδιοι the proper time (cp. Diod S 1, 50, 7 ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις χρόνοις; likew. 5, 80, 3; Jos., Ant. 11, 171; Ps.-Clemens, Hom. 3, 16; TestSol 6:3 ἐν καιρῷ ἰ.; Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰ. καιρῶν; Mel., P. 38, 258ff) 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; 1 Cl 20:4; cp. 1 Ti 3:4f, 12; 4:2; 5:4. ἴδιαι λειτουργίαι … ἴδιος ὁ τόπος … ἴδιαι διακονίαι in each case proper: ministrations, … place, … services 1 Cl 40:5.—In ἰδία ἐπίλυσις 2 Pt 1:20 one’s own private interpretation is contrasted with the meaning intended by the author himself or with the interpretation of another person who is authorized or competent (s. ἐπίλυσις and WWeeda, NThSt 2, 1919, 129–35).—All these pass. are close to mng. 3; it is esp. difficult to fix the boundaries here.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἴδιος

  • 118 Logic

       My initial step... was to attempt to reduce the concept of ordering in a sequence to that of logical consequence, so as to proceed from there to the concept of number. To prevent anything intuitive from penetrating here unnoticed, I had to bend every effort to keep the chain of inference free of gaps. In attempting to comply with this requirement in the strictest possible way, I found the inadequacy of language to be an obstacle. (Frege, 1972, p. 104)
       I believe I can make the relation of my 'conceptual notation' to ordinary language clearest if I compare it to the relation of the microscope to the eye. The latter, because of the range of its applicability and because of the ease with which it can adapt itself to the most varied circumstances, has a great superiority over the microscope. Of course, viewed as an optical instrument it reveals many imperfections, which usually remain unnoticed only because of its intimate connection with mental life. But as soon as scientific purposes place strong requirements upon sharpness of resolution, the eye proves to be inadequate.... Similarly, this 'conceptual notation' is devised for particular scientific purposes; and therefore one may not condemn it because it is useless for other purposes. (Frege, 1972, pp. 104-105)
       To sum up briefly, it is the business of the logician to conduct an unceasing struggle against psychology and those parts of language and grammar which fail to give untrammeled expression to what is logical. He does not have to answer the question: How does thinking normally take place in human beings? What course does it naturally follow in the human mind? What is natural to one person may well be unnatural to another. (Frege, 1979, pp. 6-7)
       We are very dependent on external aids in our thinking, and there is no doubt that the language of everyday life-so far, at least, as a certain area of discourse is concerned-had first to be replaced by a more sophisticated instrument, before certain distinctions could be noticed. But so far the academic world has, for the most part, disdained to master this instrument. (Frege, 1979, pp. 6-7)
       There is no reproach the logician need fear less than the reproach that his way of formulating things is unnatural.... If we were to heed those who object that logic is unnatural, we would run the risk of becoming embroiled in interminable disputes about what is natural, disputes which are quite incapable of being resolved within the province of logic. (Frege, 1979, p. 128)
       [L]inguists will be forced, internally as it were, to come to grips with the results of modern logic. Indeed, this is apparently already happening to some extent. By "logic" is not meant here recursive function-theory, California model-theory, constructive proof-theory, or even axiomatic settheory. Such areas may or may not be useful for linguistics. Rather under "logic" are included our good old friends, the homely locutions "and," "or," "if-then," "if and only if," "not," "for all x," "for some x," and "is identical with," plus the calculus of individuals, event-logic, syntax, denotational semantics, and... various parts of pragmatics.... It is to these that the linguist can most profitably turn for help. These are his tools. And they are "clean tools," to borrow a phrase of the late J. L. Austin in another context, in fact, the only really clean ones we have, so that we might as well use them as much as we can. But they constitute only what may be called "baby logic." Baby logic is to the linguist what "baby mathematics" (in the phrase of Murray Gell-Mann) is to the theoretical physicist-very elementary but indispensable domains of theory in both cases. (Martin, 1969, pp. 261-262)
       There appears to be no branch of deductive inference that requires us to assume the existence of a mental logic in order to do justice to the psychological phenomena. To be logical, an individual requires, not formal rules of inference, but a tacit knowledge of the fundamental semantic principle governing any inference; a deduction is valid provided that there is no way of interpreting the premises correctly that is inconsistent with the conclusion. Logic provides a systematic method for searching for such counter-examples. The empirical evidence suggests that ordinary individuals possess no such methods. (Johnson-Laird, quoted in Mehler, Walker & Garrett, 1982, p. 130)
       The fundamental paradox of logic [that "there is no class (as a totality) of those classes which, each taken as a totality, do not belong to themselves" (Russell to Frege, 16 June 1902, in van Heijenoort, 1967, p. 125)] is with us still, bequeathed by Russell-by way of philosophy, mathematics, and even computer science-to the whole of twentieth-century thought. Twentieth-century philosophy would begin not with a foundation for logic, as Russell had hoped in 1900, but with the discovery in 1901 that no such foundation can be laid. (Everdell, 1997, p. 184)

    Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Logic

  • 119 crédulo

    adj.
    credulous, gullible, dupe, unsuspecting.
    * * *
    1 credulous, gullible
    * * *
    crédulo, -a
    1.
    ADJ gullible, credulous
    2.
    SM / F
    * * *
    - la adjetivo credulous, gullible
    * * *
    = credulous, unsuspecting, gullible.
    Ex. It is difficult to see how the following typical enquiries could be answered the consultation of a dictionary: 'Where does the phrase `to set the river on fire` come from?' or 'What does ` credulous` mean?'.
    Ex. There has been little planning about what to do about the huge quantities of unevaluated and perhaps unwanted information which threatens to engulf the unsuspecting user.
    Ex. I argue that intellectual vices (such as being gullible, dogmatic, pigheaded, or prejudiced) are essential.
    ----
    * crédulos, los = unsuspecting, the, gullible, the.
    * * *
    - la adjetivo credulous, gullible
    * * *
    = credulous, unsuspecting, gullible.

    Ex: It is difficult to see how the following typical enquiries could be answered the consultation of a dictionary: 'Where does the phrase `to set the river on fire` come from?' or 'What does ` credulous` mean?'.

    Ex: There has been little planning about what to do about the huge quantities of unevaluated and perhaps unwanted information which threatens to engulf the unsuspecting user.
    Ex: I argue that intellectual vices (such as being gullible, dogmatic, pigheaded, or prejudiced) are essential.
    * crédulos, los = unsuspecting, the, gullible, the.

    * * *
    credulous, gullible
    * * *

    crédulo
    ◊ -la adjetivo

    credulous, gullible
    crédulo,-a adjetivo credulous, gullible

    ' crédulo' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    crédula
    - confiado
    English:
    credulous
    - deluded
    - gullible
    * * *
    crédulo, -a
    adj
    credulous, gullible
    nm,f
    credulous o gullible person
    * * *
    adj credulous
    * * *
    crédulo, -la adj
    : credulous, gullible

    Spanish-English dictionary > crédulo

  • 120 ostentar

    v.
    1 to hold, to have.
    2 to show off, to parade.
    3 to hold, to occupy (position).
    * * *
    1 (jactarse de) to show off, flaunt
    2 (poseer) to hold
    \
    ostentar el cargo de to hold the position of
    * * *
    VT
    1) (=exhibir) to show; (=hacer gala de) to flaunt, parade, show off
    2) (=tener) [+ poderes legales] to have, possess; [+ cargo, título] to have, hold
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    1) (frml) ( tener) <cargo/título> to hold

    la empresa ostenta el liderazgo en... — the company is the market leader in...

    2) ( exhibir) <alhajas/dinero> to flaunt
    2.
    ostentar vi to show off
    * * *
    = boast, flaunt, blow + Posesivo + own trumpet, brag, show off, sport.
    Ex. In fact, he boasts that he knows more about library work than all of us who have our master's degrees put together.
    Ex. After some sort of formal training, they flaunt the so-called basic rules of management.
    Ex. Even the president and his henchmen could not resist blowing their own trumpet.
    Ex. While pirates and ancient mariners may have bragged about sailing the seven seas, the phrase is merely figurative.
    Ex. The district will proudly show off its historical heritage: the monastic library at Broumov, founded in the 13th century by Benedictine monks.
    Ex. She has been sporting a little bit of a bump lately, leading everyone to think she may have a bun in the oven.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    1) (frml) ( tener) <cargo/título> to hold

    la empresa ostenta el liderazgo en... — the company is the market leader in...

    2) ( exhibir) <alhajas/dinero> to flaunt
    2.
    ostentar vi to show off
    * * *
    = boast, flaunt, blow + Posesivo + own trumpet, brag, show off, sport.

    Ex: In fact, he boasts that he knows more about library work than all of us who have our master's degrees put together.

    Ex: After some sort of formal training, they flaunt the so-called basic rules of management.
    Ex: Even the president and his henchmen could not resist blowing their own trumpet.
    Ex: While pirates and ancient mariners may have bragged about sailing the seven seas, the phrase is merely figurative.
    Ex: The district will proudly show off its historical heritage: the monastic library at Broumov, founded in the 13th century by Benedictine monks.
    Ex: She has been sporting a little bit of a bump lately, leading everyone to think she may have a bun in the oven.

    * * *
    ostentar [A1 ]
    vt
    A ( frml) (tener) ‹cargo/título› to hold
    la empresa ostenta el liderazgo en su especialidad the company is the market leader in its field
    B (exhibir) ‹alhajas/dinero› to flaunt
    ■ ostentar
    vi
    to show off
    nos invitó al restaurante más caro sólo para ostentar he invited us to the most expensive restaurant just to impress us o to show off
    * * *

    ostentar ( conjugate ostentar) verbo transitivo
    1 (frml) ( tener) ‹cargo/título to hold
    2 ( exhibir) ‹alhajas/dinero to flaunt
    verbo intransitivo
    to show off
    ostentar verbo transitivo
    1 (exhibir) to flaunt
    2 (un cargo, un título) to hold
    ' ostentar' also found in these entries:
    English:
    boast
    - flaunt
    - sport
    - hold
    * * *
    1. [poseer] to hold, to have
    2. [exhibir] to show off, to parade
    3. [cargo] to hold, to occupy
    * * *
    v/t
    1 flaunt
    2 cargo hold
    * * *
    1) : to display, to flaunt
    2) poseer: to have, to hold
    ostenta el récord mundial: he holds the world record

    Spanish-English dictionary > ostentar

См. также в других словарях:

  • The Phrase That Pays — Infobox Single Name = The Phrase That Pays Artist = The Academy Is... from Album = Almost Here Released = February 8, 2005 Recorded = Genre = Emo, Pop punk Length = 3:17 Label = Fueled by Ramen Writer = William Beckett, Michael Carden Producer =… …   Wikipedia

  • coined the phrase — invented the saying, created the phrase …   English contemporary dictionary

  • The Cantos — by Ezra Pound is a long, incomplete poem in 120 sections, each of which is a canto . Most of it was written between 1915 and 1962, although much of the early work was abandoned and the early cantos, as finally published, date from 1922 onwards.… …   Wikipedia

  • Phrase completions — Phrase completion scales are a type of psychometric scale used in questionnaires. Developed in response to the problems associated with Likert scales, Phrase completions are concise, unidimensional measures that tap ordinal level data in a manner …   Wikipedia

  • phrase — phrase, idiom, expression, locution mean a group of words which, taken together, express a notion and may be used as a part of a sentence. Phrase may apply to a group of words which for one reason or another recurs frequently (as in the language… …   New Dictionary of Synonyms

  • The beatings will continue until morale improves — is a famous quote of questionable origin. It describes how morale, possibly in a military unit, will be kept high through the use of physical violence.OriginThe origin of the phrase is largely unknown, causing some to speculate that it is… …   Wikipedia

  • The Constitution is not a suicide pact — is a phrase in American political and legal discourse. The phrase expresses the belief that constitutional restrictions on governmental power must be balanced against the need for survival of the state and its people. It is most often attributed… …   Wikipedia

  • The Syro-Aramaic Reading of the Koran —   …   Wikipedia

  • The Dan Patrick Show — Genre Sports talk Created by Dan Patrick Starring Dan Patrick Paul Paulie Pabst Patrick Seton O Connor Todd Fritzy Fritz Andrew McLovin Perloff Country of origin Unite …   Wikipedia

  • The Blessed Virgin Mary —     The Blessed Virgin Mary     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Blessed Virgin Mary     The Blessed Virgin Mary is the mother of Jesus Christ, the mother of God.     In general, the theology and history of Mary the Mother of God follow the… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Real Presence of Christ in the Eucharist —     The Real Presence of Christ in the Eucharist     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Real Presence of Christ in the Eucharist     In this article we shall consider:     ♦ the fact of the Real Presence, which is, indeed, the central dogma;     ♦ the …   Catholic encyclopedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»